Script | Spoken-Tutorial - User contributions [en]

PostgreSQL-Database/C2/NULL-Values-and-UPDATE-Statement/English

2026-04-23T05:26:53Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title of the Script: NULL Values and UPDATE Statement'''.

'''Author: EduPyramids'''

'''Keywords: ''' PostgreSQL, pgAdmin 4, syntax, NULL values, IS NULL, UPDATE statement, EduPyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this Spoken Tutorial on''' NULL Values and UPDATE Statement'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to,
* Insert and Display '''Null''' values and
* '''UPDATE''' Statement
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements '''
* '''Ubuntu 24.04''' '''LTS'''
* '''PostgreSQL version 18.1''', and
* '''PgAdmin 4 version 9.11'''.
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites '''

[https://edupyramids.org https://EduPyramids.org] '''

|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should have '''PostgreSQL''' and '''p g Admin 4.'''
* For the prerequisite '''PostgreSQL''' tutorials, please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files '''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:
* '''nvu-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the '''Code''' '''Files''' link of this tutorial page.

Please download and extract the file.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''What is a NULL Value?'''
|| A '''null''' value is an unknown or missing value.

If a field has no value it can be left blank as no data stored in it.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Syntax of Null'''

'''SELECT column_names'''

'''FROM table_name'''

'''WHERE column_name IS NULL<nowiki>; </nowiki>'''
|| This is the syntax to show a '''Null''' value.

'''IS NULL''' clause checks for fields that have no stored values.
|-
||
|| I have opened the '''p g Admin 4 '''interface and connected to the localhost server.
|-
|| Type:''' INSERT INTO students (studentid, studentname, city, gender, dob, cgpa)'''

'''VALUES ('S116', 'Ravi', 'Pune', 'M', NULL, NULL);'''

Click the''' Execute query icon.'''
|| Let us insert a '''NULL''' value. For this, type the following query.

Here the '''NULL''' keyword is used to insert null values.

Let us execute the query.

The query is returned successfully.
|-
|| Type: '''INSERT INTO students (studentid, studentname, city, gender)'''

'''VALUES ('S117', 'Kiran', 'Pune', 'M');'''

Click on the''' Execute query button'''.

ADD ANNOTATION.( '''CGPA''' and '''DOB''' are automatically set to '''NULL''')
|| Type the following query and execute it.

Here, '''C G P A''' and '''D O B columns''' are automatically set to '''NULL'''.
|-
||
|| We can add a '''NULL value''' by inserting a record without specifying its value.
|-
|| Type: '''SELECT * FROM students'''

'''WHERE cgpa IS NULL;'''
|| Type the following query.

Here we are using the '''IS NULL '''clause.

Let us execute the query.

The output displays details of students whose '''C G P A''' is currently not recorded.
|-
|| Point to '''D O B''' and '''C G P A''' values.
|| Here, the '''D O B''' and '''C G P A''' values are not known.
|-
||
|| Now let us see another example.
|-
|| Type: '''SELECT studentid, studentname'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE cgpa IS NULL;'''

Click on the''' Execute query button'''.
|| Type the following query and execute it.

This query displays studentid and their names whose '''C G P A''' value is '''NULL'''.
|-
||
|| Let us update the record so that it no longer displays NULL.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''UPDATE statement'''
|| '''UPDATE''' Statement is used to modify existing records in a table.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Syntax of UPDATE Statement'''

'''UPDATE table_name'''

'''SET column1 = value1, column2 = value2, ...'''

'''WHERE condition; '''
|| Here is the syntax of the UPDATE statement.'''UPDATE''' specifies the table to be modified.

'''SET''' assigns new values to one or more columns.

'''WHERE''' selects the records that need to be updated.
|-
|| Type: '''UPDATE students'''

'''SET cgpa = 8.1'''

'''WHERE studentid = 'S116';'''

Click on the''' Execute query button'''.
|| Let us update the Null value.

Type this query.

Here the '''SET''' keyword sets the C G P A value to 8 point 1.

Let us execute the query.
|-
|| '''Cursor on Query returned successfully in 322 msec.'''
|| The output shows that the query is updated.
|-
|| Type:

'''SELECT * FROM students '''

'''WHERE studentid = ‘S116’;'''
|| Now let us type this query and execute it.

We can see that a new record is added to the table.
|-
|| Show the table and point to M in the records.
|| Let us update the records of students with studentids S116 and S117.
|-
|| Type the following:'''UPDATE students'''

'''SET gender = 'Male''''

'''WHERE studentid = 'S116''''

'''OR studentid = 'S117';'''

Click on the Execute Query button.
|| Type the following query.

In this query we will set the gender to male.

Let us execute the query.

The table is now updated.
|-
|| Type: '''SELECT * FROM students; '''

Click on the Execute Query button.

Point to the gender columns of the students.
|| Let us display the entire table.

Type this query and execute it.

We can see that in the gender column '''M''' is updated to '''Male''' for studentids '''S116 '''and''' S117'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt how to,
* Insert and Display Null values and
* UPDATE Statement
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Assignment'''

'''As an Assignment, '''

Insert a student record with a NULL CGPA value.

Update the NULL CGPA value for one student.

Verify the updated record using a SELECT query.
|| We encourage you to do this assignment.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

'''Thank you'''

This '''Spoken''' '''Tutorial''' is brought to you by '''EduPyramids''' Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.
|| Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

PostgreSQL-Database/C2/NULL-Values-and-UPDATE-Statement/English

2026-04-20T07:44:04Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: NULL Values and UPDATE Statement'''. '''Author: Ketki Bhamble''' '''Keywords: '''PostgreSQL, pgAdmin 4, Logical operators, AND, OR, NOT, WHERE, EduPy..."

'''Title of the Script: NULL Values and UPDATE Statement'''.

'''Author: Ketki Bhamble'''

'''Keywords: '''PostgreSQL, pgAdmin 4, Logical operators, AND, OR, NOT, WHERE, EduPyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this Spoken Tutorial on''' NULL Values and UPDATE Statement'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to,
* Insert and Display '''Null''' values and
* '''UPDATE''' Statement
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements '''
* '''Ubuntu 24.04''' '''LTS'''
* '''PostgreSQL version 18.1''', and
* '''PgAdmin 4 version 9.11'''.
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites '''

[https://edupyramids.org https://EduPyramids.org] '''

|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should have '''PostgreSQL''' and '''p g Admin 4.'''
* For the prerequisite '''PostgreSQL''' tutorials, please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files '''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:
* '''nvu-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link on this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the '''Code''' '''Files''' link of this tutorial page.

Please download and extract the file.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''What is a NULL Value?'''
|| A '''null''' value is an unknown or missing value.

If a field has no value it can be left blank as no data stored in it.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Syntax of Null value'''

'''SELECT column_names'''

'''FROM table_name'''

'''WHERE column_name IS NULL<nowiki>; </nowiki>'''
|| This is the syntax to show a '''Null''' value.

'''IS NULL''' clause checks for fields that have no stored values.
|-
||
|| I have opened the '''p g Admin 4 '''interface and connected to the localhost server.
|-
|| Type:''' INSERT INTO students (studentid, studentname, city, gender, dob, cgpa)'''

'''VALUES ('S116', 'Ravi', 'Pune', 'M', NULL, NULL);'''

Click the''' Execute query icon.'''
|| Let us insert a '''NULL''' value.For this, type the following query.

Here the '''NULL''' keyword is used to insert null values.

Let us execute the query.

The query is returned successfully.
|-
|| Type: '''INSERT INTO students (studentid, studentname, city, gender)'''

'''VALUES ('S117', 'Kiran', 'Pune', 'M');'''

Click on the''' Execute query button'''.

ADD ANNOTATION.( '''CGPA''' and '''DOB''' are automatically set to '''NULL''')
|| Type the following query and execute it. Here, '''C G P A''' and '''D O B columns''' are automatically set to '''NULL'''.
|-
||
|| We can add a '''NULL value''' by inserting a record without specifying its value.
|-
|| Type: '''SELECT * FROM students'''

'''WHERE cgpa IS NULL;'''
|| Type the following query.

Here we are using the I'''S NULL '''clause.

Let us execute the query.

The output displays details of students whose '''C G P A''' is currently not recorded.
|-
||
|| Here, the '''D O B''' and '''C G P A''' values are not known.
|-
||
|| Now let us see another example.
|-
|| Type: '''SELECT studentid, studentname'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE cgpa IS NULL;'''

Click on the''' Execute query button'''.
|| Type the following query and execute it. This query displays studentid and their names whose '''C G P A''' value is '''NULL'''.
|-
||
|| Let us update the record so that it no longer displays NULL.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''UPDATE Statement'''
|| '''UPDATE''' Statement is used to modify existing records in a table.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Syntax of UPDATE Statement'''.

'''UPDATE table_name'''

'''SET column1 = value1, column2 = value2, ...'''

'''WHERE condition; '''
|| Here is the syntax of the UPDATE statement.'''UPDATE''' specifies the table to be modified.

'''SET''' assigns new values to one or more columns.

'''WHERE''' selects the records that need to be updated.
|-
|| Type: '''UPDATE students'''

'''SET cgpa = 8.1'''

'''WHERE studentid = 'S116';'''

Click on the''' Execute query button'''.
|| Let us update the Null value.

Type this query.

Here the '''SET''' keyword sets the C G P A value to 8 point 1.

Let us execute the query.
|-
|| '''Cursor on Query returned successfully in 322 msec.'''
|| The output shows that the query is updated.
|-
|| Type:

'''SELECT * FROM students '''

'''WHERE studentid = ‘S116’;'''
|| Now let us type this query and execute it.

We can see that a new record is added to the table.
|-
|| Show the table and point to M in the records.
|| Let us update the records of students with studentids S116 and S117
|-
|| Type the following:'''UPDATE students'''

'''SET gender = 'Male''''

'''WHERE studentid = 'S116''''

'''OR studentid = 'S117';'''

Click on the Execute Query button.
|| Type the following query.

In this query we will set the gender to male.

Let us execute the query.

The table is now updated.
|-
|| Type: '''SELECT * FROM students; '''

Click on the Execute Query button.

Point to the gender columns of the students.
|| Let us display the entire table.Type this query and execute it.

We can see that in the gender column M is updated to Male for studentids '''S116 '''and''' S117'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt how to,
* Insert and Display Null values and
* UPDATE Statement
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Assignment'''

'''As an Assignment, '''

Insert a student record with a NULL CGPA value.

Update the NULL CGPA value for one student.

Verify the updated record using a SELECT query.
|| We encourage you to do this assignment.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

'''Thank you'''

This '''Spoken''' '''Tutorial''' is brought to you by '''EduPyramids''' Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.
|| Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

PostgreSQL-Database/C2/Logical-Operators/English

2026-04-17T10:41:46Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title of the Script: Logical Operators in PostgreSQL'''

'''Author: EduPyramids'''

'''Keywords: '''PostgreSQL, pgAdmin 4, Logical operators, AND, OR, NOT, WHERE, EduPyramids, Video Tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this Spoken Tutorial on''' Logical Operators '''in''' PostgreSQL'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about
* '''AND''', '''OR '''and''' NOT''' operators.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements '''
* '''Ubuntu 24.04''' '''LTS'''
* '''PostgreSQL version 18.1''', and
* '''PgAdmin 4 version 9.11'''.
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites '''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org] '''
|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should have '''PostgreSQL''' and '''pgAdmin 4 '''
* For the prerequisite '''PostgreSQL '''tutorials, please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files '''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:
* '''lo-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link on this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.

Please download and extract the file.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Logical Operators'''
|| '''Logical''' '''operators''' are used to combine multiple conditions in a query.

They help to filter records by evaluating conditions.

We will use '''AND''', '''OR''', and '''NOT '''operators to explain various conditions'''.'''
|-
||
|| Let us use the '''AND''' operator in a query.

I have opened the '''pgAdmin 4 '''interface and connected to the localhost server.
|-
|| Type:

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE city = 'Pune' AND gender = 'Female';'''

'''Highlight:WHERE'''

'''Highlight:AND'''
|| Let us type the following query.

Here, we are using the '''WHERE''' clause along with the '''AND''' operator.

The condition checks if the city is Pune and gender is Female.

In '''AND''' operation, only those records are shown that satisfy both the conditions.
|-
|| click the '''execute''' '''query''' button.

Point
|| Click the''' Execute''' query icon on the toolbar.

The output shows only two records that satisfy the given condition.

Observe that records of only female students from Pune are displayed.
|-
||
|| Let us use the '''OR''' operator in an example.
|-
|| '''Type''':

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE city = 'Mumbai' OR city = 'Delhi';'''

'''Highlight:WHERE'''

'''Highlight:OR'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Now type the following query.

Here, we use the '''WHERE''' clause with the '''OR''' operator.

This condition checks whether the city is Mumbai or Delhi.

Rows that satisfy at least one of these conditions are displayed.

Let us execute the query.

We see the details of students from Mumbai and Delhi.
|-
||
|| Now, let us see an example of the '''NOT''' operator.
|-
|| '''Type:'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE NOT gender = 'Male';'''

'''Highlight:WHERE'''

'''Highlight:NOT'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.

|| Type the following query.

Here, we use the '''WHERE''' clause with the '''NOT''' operator.

This condition excludes all the rows where gender is Male.

Let us execute the query.

The output shows the details of all the female students.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we learnt about
* '''AND''', '''OR''' and''' NOT operators'''.

|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Assignment'''

'''As an Assignment, '''
* Retrieve the details of students who are from Chennai and whose gender is Female.
* Display the records of students who are from Hyderabad or Bangalore.
* List all students who are not from Pune.
* Find students whose gender is Male and not from Mumbai.
* List student details where city is Jaipur or Ahmedabad, but gender is not Female.
|| We encourage you to do this assignment.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

This '''Spoken''' '''Tutorial''' is brought to you by '''EduPyramids''' Educational Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.

'''Thank you'''
|| Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

PostgreSQL-Database/C2/Logical-Operators/English

2026-04-17T10:40:21Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: Logical Operators in PostgreSQL''' '''Author: EduPyramids / Ketki Bhamble''' '''Keywords: '''PostgreSQL, pgAdmin 4, Logical operators, AND, OR, NOT,..."

'''Title of the Script: Logical Operators in PostgreSQL'''

'''Author: EduPyramids / Ketki Bhamble'''

'''Keywords: '''PostgreSQL, pgAdmin 4, Logical operators, AND, OR, NOT, WHERE, EduPyramids, Video Tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this Spoken Tutorial on''' Logical Operators '''in''' PostgreSQL'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about
* '''AND''', '''OR '''and''' NOT''' operators.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements '''
* '''Ubuntu 24.04''' '''LTS'''
* '''PostgreSQL version 18.1''', and
* '''PgAdmin 4 version 9.11'''.
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites '''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org] '''
|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should have '''PostgreSQL''' and '''pgAdmin 4 '''
* For the prerequisite '''PostgreSQL '''tutorials, please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files '''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:
* '''lo-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link on this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.

Please download and extract the file.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Logical Operators'''
|| '''Logical''' '''operators''' are used to combine multiple conditions in a query.

They help to filter records by evaluating conditions.

We will use '''AND''', '''OR''', and '''NOT '''operators to explain various conditions'''.'''
|-
||
|| Let us use the '''AND''' operator in a query.

I have opened the '''pgAdmin 4 '''interface and connected to the localhost server.
|-
|| Type:

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE city = 'Pune' AND gender = 'Female';'''

'''Highlight:WHERE'''

'''Highlight:AND'''
|| Let us type the following query.

Here, we are using the '''WHERE''' clause along with the '''AND''' operator.

The condition checks if the city is Pune and gender is Female.

In '''AND''' operation, only those records are shown that satisfy both the conditions.
|-
|| click the '''execute''' '''query''' button.

Point
|| Click the''' Execute''' query icon on the toolbar.

The output shows only two records that satisfy the given condition.

Observe that records of only female students from Pune are displayed.
|-
||
|| Let us use the '''OR''' operator in an example.
|-
|| '''Type''':

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE city = 'Mumbai' OR city = 'Delhi';'''

'''Highlight:WHERE'''

'''Highlight:OR'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Now type the following query.

Here, we use the '''WHERE''' clause with the '''OR''' operator.

This condition checks whether the city is Mumbai or Delhi.

Rows that satisfy at least one of these conditions are displayed.

Let us execute the query.

We see the details of students from Mumbai and Delhi.
|-
||
|| Now, let us see an example of the '''NOT''' operator.
|-
|| '''Type:'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE NOT gender = 'Male';'''

'''Highlight:WHERE'''

'''Highlight:NOT'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.

|| Type the following query.

Here, we use the '''WHERE''' clause with the '''NOT''' operator.

This condition excludes all the rows where gender is Male.

Let us execute the query.

The output shows the details of all the female students.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we learnt about
* '''AND''', '''OR''' and''' NOT operators'''.

|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Assignment'''

'''As an Assignment, '''
* Retrieve the details of students who are from Chennai and whose gender is Female.
* Display the records of students who are from Hyderabad or Bangalore.
* List all students who are not from Pune.
* Find students whose gender is Male and not from Mumbai.
* List student details where city is Jaipur or Ahmedabad, but gender is not Female.
|| We encourage you to do this assignment.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

This '''Spoken''' '''Tutorial''' is brought to you by '''EduPyramids''' Educational Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.

'''Thank you'''
|| Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

PostgreSQL-Database/C2/Relational-Operators/English

2026-04-10T09:47:21Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title of the Script: Relational Operators.'''

'''Authors: EduPyramids.'''

'''Keywords:''' postgresql, pgadmin4, Relational operators, equal to, not equal to, greater than, less than, greater than or equal to, less than or equal to, WHERE clause, EduPyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this Spoken Tutorial on '''Relational Operators '''in''' Postgres Q L'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about
* '''Relational operators'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements '''
* '''Ubuntu 24.04 LTS'''
* '''PostgreSQL version 18.1''', and
* '''PgAdmin 4 version 9.11'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites '''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org] '''
|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should have '''Postgres Q L''' and '''p g Admin 4'''.
* For the prerequisite '''Postgres Q L''' tutorials, please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files '''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:
* '''ro-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link on this tutorial page.

Please download and extract the file.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.

Please download and extract the file.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Relational operators'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE city = ‘Bhopal’;'''

'''Highlight: WHERE'''
|| Relational operators are used to compare values in a table.

They are used along with the '''WHERE''' clause to filter the records.

They return only those rows that satisfy a specified condition.
|-
|| '''Point to the interface.'''
|| I have opened the '''p g Admin 4 '''interface and connected to the localhost server.
|-
||
|| Now let us use relational operators to execute queries with different conditions.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE city = 'Delhi';'''

'''Highlight: WHERE city = 'Delhi';'''

Press the '''Execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Let us type this query.

In this query we will retrieve the records of students using equal to operator.

Click the Execute query icon to execute the query.

This query displays the details of the student Bindu, who resides in Delhi.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE cgpa > 9.0;'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Next let us type this query.

Here we will retrieve the records of students whose C G P A is greater than 9 point zero.

Let us execute the query.

Output shows the details of students whose C G P A is greater than 9 point zero.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE cgpa < 8.0;'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Next, let us type this query.

Here we will retrieve the records of students whose C G P A is less than 8 point zero.

Now execute this query to see the output.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT * FROM students'''

'''WHERE dob>= '1996-04-22';'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Let us now retrieve the records of students based on date of birth.

I will type the query that uses the greater than or equal to operator.

Then execute it.

The output displays all student records who were born on or after 22 April 1996.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT * FROM students'''

'''WHERE studentid <= 'S111';'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Next, let us retrieve the records of students whose student id is '''S 1 1 1 '''or less.

Let me type this query.

Here we have used less than or equal to operator.

Let us execute the query.

Notice the records of students in the table.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE city <> 'Mumbai';'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Now, let us retrieve the records of students whose city is not Mumbai.

Let us type this query.

Here we have used the not equal to operator.

Now execute the query.

The output displays all students who are not from Mumbai.
|-
||
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.
|-
|| '''Slide 7 '''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we learnt about
* Relational operators.

|| Let us summarize.
|-
|| '''Slide 8 '''

'''Assignment'''

'''As an Assignment,'''
* Retrieve the details of students who reside in the city Pune.
* Display the details of students whose gender is Female.
* Retrieve the details of students who were born before 1st January 1996.
* Display the details of students whose student ID is not S101.
|| We encourage you to do this assignment.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited, SINE, IIT Bombay.'''

'''Thank You'''
|| Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

PostgreSQL-Database/C2/Filtering-and-Sorting-Data/English

2026-04-07T10:41:12Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title of the Script: Filtering and Sorting Data '''

'''Author: EduPyramids'''

'''Keywords: '''PostgreSQL, pgAdmin 4, WHERE, ORDER BY, data filtering, data sorting, ascending order, descending order, EduPyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration '''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this Spoken Tutorial on''' Filtering and Sorting Data '''in''' Postgresql'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to use,
* '''WHERE''' clause and
* '''ORDER BY '''clause.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements '''
* '''Ubuntu 24.04''' '''LTS'''
* '''PostgreSQL version 18.1''', and
* '''PgAdmin 4 version 9.11'''.
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites '''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org] '''
|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should have '''PostgreSQL''' and '''p g Admin 4'''.''' '''
* For the prerequisite '''PostgreSQL''' tutorials, please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files '''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:
* '''wo-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link on this tutorial page.

Please download and extract the file.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.

Please download and extract the file.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''WHERE Clause'''
|| The''' WHERE''' clause is used to apply a condition to filter records.

It is used to extract only those records that satisfy a specified condition.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Syntax of Where clause '''

'''SELECT column1, column2'''

'''FROM table_name'''

'''WHERE condition;'''
|| The basic syntax of the '''WHERE '''clause is shown here.
|-
|| '''Point to the interface.'''
|| I have opened the '''p g Admin 4 '''interface and connected to the localhost server.
|-
|| '''Show the code file while recording.'''
|| Let us insert a few records of the students.

Please copy and paste this code from the code file in the query window.
|-
|| '''Click the Execute query icon on the tool bar.'''
|| Let us click the''' Execute query icon '''on the''' toolbar''' to insert the rows.
|-
|| '''SELECT * FROM students'''

'''WHERE studentname = 'Ram';'''

'''Click the Execute query icon.'''

'''Point to the output.'''
|| Now I will type this query.

In this query '''SELECT '''keyword''' '''is used to retrieve data.

'''WHERE keyword''' filters the rows and shows all the details of the student named '''Ram'''.

Let us execute the query to see the output.
|-
|| '''SELECT * FROM students'''

'''WHERE studentid = 'S102';'''

'''Press the Execute query icon.'''
|| Let us type another query using a '''WHERE''' clause.

I will execute the query to see the details of the student with I D S 1 0 2.
|-
||
|| Next, let us learn about the '''ORDER BY''' clause.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''ORDER BY Clause'''
|| The '''ORDER BY''' clause sorts the records in ascending or descending order.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Syntax of ORDER BY Clause'''

'''SELECT column1, column2, ...'''

'''FROM table_name'''

'''ORDER BY column1, column2, ... ASC|DESC;'''
|| This is the syntax of the '''ORDER BY '''clause.

Here '''A S C''' sorts the data in ascending order.

'''D E S C''' sorts the data in descending order.
|-
|| Type: '''SELECT * FROM students'''

'''ORDER BY cgpa;'''

'''Highlight ORDER BY'''

Click the Execute''' query button'''.
|| Let us type this query.

By default '''ORDER BY''' clause sorts the records in ascending order.

Click the Execute query icon to execute the query.

Observe that records are sorted by '''C G P A''' in ascending order.
|-
||
|| Now let us sort the records in descending order.
|-
|| Type:

'''SELECT * FROM students'''

'''ORDER BY cgpa DESC;'''

Click the Execute''' query button'''.
|| Let us type this query.

Here the '''D E S C '''keyword''' '''sorts the records in descending order.

Now let’s execute the query.

The result shows that records are sorted by C G P A in descending order.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Summary'''In this tutorial, we learnt to use
* '''WHERE''' clause and
* '''ORDER BY''' clause
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Assignment'''
'''As an Assignment, '''
* Filter student records where city is Bhopal''' '''
* Display all student records in ascending and descending orders sorted by city
|| We encourage you to do this assignment.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

'''Thank you'''

This '''Spoken''' '''Tutorial''' is brought to you by '''EduPyramids''' Educational Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.
|| Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

PostgreSQL-Database/C2/Relational-Operators/English

2026-04-07T10:27:10Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: Relational Operators.''' '''Authors: EduPyramids.''' '''Keywords:''' postgresql, pgadmin4, Relational operators, equal to, not equal to, greater than..."

'''Title of the Script: Relational Operators.'''

'''Authors: EduPyramids.'''

'''Keywords:''' postgresql, pgadmin4, Relational operators, equal to, not equal to, greater than, less than, greater than or equal to, less than or equal to, WHERE clause, edupyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this Spoken Tutorial on '''Relational Operators '''in''' Postgres Q L'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about
* '''Relational operators'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements '''
* '''Ubuntu 24.04 LTS'''
* '''PostgreSQL version 18.1''', and
* '''PgAdmin 4 version 9.11'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites '''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org] '''
|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should have '''Postgres Q L''' and '''p g Admin 4'''.
* For the prerequisite '''Postgres Q L''' tutorials, please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files '''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:
* '''ro-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link on this tutorial page.

Please download and extract the file.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.

Please download and extract the file.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Relational operators'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE city = ‘Bhopal’;'''

'''Highlight: WHERE'''
|| Relational operators are used to compare values in a table.

They are used along with the '''WHERE''' clause to filter the records.

They return only those rows that satisfy a specified condition.
|-
|| '''Point to the interface.'''
|| I have opened the '''p g Admin 4 '''interface and connected to the localhost server.
|-
||
|| Now let us use relational operators to execute queries with different conditions.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE city = 'Delhi';'''

'''Highlight: WHERE city = 'Delhi';'''

Press the '''Execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Let us type this query.

In this query we will retrieve the records of students using equal to operator.

Click the Execute query icon to execute the query.

This query displays the details of the student Bindu, who resides in Delhi.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE cgpa > 9.0;'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Next let us type this query.

Here we will retrieve the records of students whose C G P A is greater than 9 point zero.

Let us execute the query.

Output shows the details of students whose C G P A is greater than 9 point zero.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE cgpa < 8.0;'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Next, let us type this query.

Here we will retrieve the records of students whose C G P A is less than 8 point zero.

Now execute this query to see the output.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT * FROM students'''

'''WHERE dob>= '1996-04-22';'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Let us now retrieve the records of students based on date of birth.

I will type the query that uses the greater than or equal to operator.

Then execute it.

The output displays all student records who were born on or after 22 April 1996.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT * FROM students'''

'''WHERE studentid <= 'S111';'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Next, let us retrieve the records of students whose student id is '''S 1 1 1 '''or less.

Let me type this query.

Here we have used less than or equal to operator.

Let us execute the query.

Notice the records of students in the table.
|-
|| '''Type the following query:'''

'''SELECT *'''

'''FROM students'''

'''WHERE city <> 'Mumbai';'''

Press the '''execute''' '''query''' button.
|| Now, let us retrieve the records of students whose city is not Mumbai.

Let us type this query.

Here we have used the not equal to operator.

Now execute the query.

The output displays all students who are not from Mumbai.
|-
||
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.
|-
|| '''Slide 7 '''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we learnt about
* Relational operators.

|| Let us summarize.
|-
|| '''Slide 8 '''

'''Assignment'''

'''As an Assignment,'''
* Retrieve the details of students who reside in the city Pune.
* Display the details of students whose gender is Female.
* Retrieve the details of students who were born before 1st January 1996.
* Display the details of students whose student ID is not S101.
|| We encourage you to do this assignment.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited, SINE, IIT Bombay.'''

'''Thank You'''
|| Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

PostgreSQL-Database/C2/Data-Redundancy-and-Primary-Key/English

2026-02-07T04:44:37Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: Data Redundancy and Primary Key''' '''Author''': '''EduPyramids''' '''Keywords''':''' Data redundancy, Query Tool,''' '''use a''' '''primary key, DRO..."

'''Title of the Script: Data Redundancy and Primary Key'''

'''Author''': '''EduPyramids'''

'''Keywords''':''' Data redundancy, Query Tool,''' '''use a''' '''primary key, DROP TABLE, EduPyramids,
Video Tutorial.'''

{| border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1 Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Data Redundancy and Primary Key'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2 Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about,
*Data redundancy
*Why data redundancy is a problem
*Primary keys, and
*How to create a table with a primary key.

|-
|| '''Slide 3 System Requirements '''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using, * '''Ubuntu
24.04''' LTS
* '''PostgreSQL version 18.1''' and
* '''pgAdmin 4 version 9.11'''.

|-
|| '''Slide 4 Pre-requisites '''
'''https://EduPyramids.org'''
|| To follow this tutorial, * Learners should have
'''PostgreSQL''' and '''pgAdmin 4''' installed in their systems.

For the pre-requisite '''PostgreSQL''' tutorials, please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5 Code Files '''
drp-codes.txt
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.
This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| Open '''pgAdmin 4'''

|| Let us open '''pgAdmin 4'''.
|-
|| Click on '''localhost''' node.
|| Please ensure that '''Localhost''' '''PostgreSQL '''server is connected.
|-
|| Click '''students''' table
|| Now let’s click on the '''students''' table.
|-
|| Right click on students tableSelect '''Query Tool'''. Cursor on '''Query''' Editor.
|| I will right click on the '''students''' table and select the '''Query Tool'''.
The '''Query''' Editor window opens on the right side.
|-
|| Type '''SELECT * FROM students;'''

'''Show SQL'''
|| Let us retrieve the data from the '''students''' table.
Type '''SELECT space asterisk space FROM space students semicolon'''.
|-
|| Click '''Execute query '''button.
Looks like a play button.Highlight the output.
|| Click on the '''Execute''' '''query '''button on the tool bar.The output is displayed in tabular format.
|-
|| Point to duplicate names
|| We can see that student names such as '''Ram''' or '''Kishore''' appear more than once.
|-
|| '''Slide 6 Data Redundancy'''
|| Data redundancy means duplication of data in a database table.
It increases storage usage, causes data inconsistency and affects database performance.
|-
||
|| To prevent data redundancy, we use a '''primary key'''.
|-
|| '''Slide7 What is a Primary Key?'''
|| A primary key is a column or a set of columns that uniquely identifies each row in a table.
|-
|| '''Slide 8 Rules of Primary Key'''
|| A table can have only one primary key, and its values must be unique and not null.Student name cannot
be a primary key as multiple students can have the same name.
|-
|| '''pgAdmin 4 cursor on Columns'''
|| Therefore, we will create a new column called '''studentid''' and make it as the primary key.
|-
|| '''pgAdmin 4'''
|| First, we must delete the existing students table.
|-
|| Right-click on the students table.
|| Let me right click on the '''students''' table.A '''context menu '''opens.
|-
|| Select '''Drop'''
|| I will select the '''Drop''' option.

Drop Table pop up box appears with a message.Click the red colored '''Drop button. '''Notice that the table
structure along with its data is deleted.
|-
|| '''DROP TABLE tablename; Add annotation'''
|| The syntax to delete a table is '''DROP TABLE tablename semicolon.'''
|-
||
|| Let us create the '''students''' table with a primary key.
|-
|| Open Right-click on the Tables and select '''Query Tool'''
|| Now let us open the '''Query Tool'''.
|-
|| '''Show SQLType CREATE TABLE students ('''
'''studentid VARCHAR(10),'''
'''studentname VARCHAR(50),'''
'''city VARCHAR(40),'''
'''gender VARCHAR(10),'''
'''dob DATE,'''
'''cgpa NUMERIC(2,1),'''
'''PRIMARY KEY (studentid)'''
''');'''
|| Let me type the following code in the query window.
|-
|| Highlight '''studentid'''
|| Here, '''studentid''' is defined as the primary key.
|-
|| Click on the '''Execute''' '''query button'''.Cursor on green notification:'''The students table is created
successfully'''.
|| Let us execute this query.The students table is created successfully.
|-
||
|| Now let us insert data into this table.
|-
|| Type: '''INSERT INTO students VALUES'''
'''('S101','Ram','Mumbai','Male','1996-10-23',9.6),'''
'''('S102','Kishore','Mumbai','Male','1996-08-09',8.5),'''
'''('S103','Pooja','Pune','Female','1995-03-25',9.2);'''
|| Let me type the following code in the query window.

|-
|| Click on the '''Execute''' '''query''' button.Show the notifications.
|| Click on the '''Execute query''' button to execute the code.The records are inserted successfully.
|-
|| Click on the '''Execute''' '''query '''button.

|| Let us insert the same data again.
For that, execute the '''INSERT''' statement once more.
|-
|| Point to error
|| We get an error message saying '''duplicate key value violates unique constraint'''.
|-
|| Point to the error.
|| This error occurs because the primary key does not allow duplicate values.Now, let us retrieve the data
again.
|-
|| Type:''' SELECT * FROM students;''' Click on the '''Execute '''button.

Show the Output.
|| Let me type '''SELECT asterisk FROM students semicolon'''.Execute the following command.Notice that
there is no duplication of data in the table.
|-
|| '''Slide 9 Summary'''
In this tutorial, we will learn about,* Data
redundancy
* Why data redundancy is a problem
* Primary keys, and
* How to create a table with a primary key.

|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.Let us summarise.
|-
|| * '''Slide 10 As an Assignment,'''
* Drop the '''Emp''' table
* Create it again with '''empno''' as the primary
key
* Insert a few records and retrieve the data.

|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 11 Thank You '''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by '''EduPyramids''' educational services private limited SINE IIT
Bombay.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Linux-File-Ownership-and-Permissions/English

2026-01-27T11:31:18Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title of the Script:''' '''Linux File Ownership and Permissions'''

'''Authors:''' '''Edupyramids'''

'''Keywords:''' Linux, File Ownership, File Permissions, chown, chmod, chgrp, Inodes, Hard link, Soft link, Symbolic link, Terminal commands, Linux file system, edupyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Linux File Ownership and Permissions.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Manage file ownership and permissions using '''c h own''' and '''c h mod''' commands.
* Change file group ownership using '''chgrp''' command.
* Describe '''i nodes '''and view '''i node''' numbers of the files.
* Create and verify '''hard links '''and '''symbolic links''' in Linux.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using:

'''Ubuntu O S version 24 point 04'''
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://EduPyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org] 
|| To follow this tutorial,

learners should have '''Ubuntu version 24 point 04.'''

For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.
# '''file-attr.zip'''
# '''fa-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''File Attributes'''

'''File-attributes.png'''
|| File attributes are properties linked to a file. Attributes define ownership and permissions.

They include file type, size, and time details. They show who owns the file and who can access it.

File attributes are viewed using the '''l s hyphen l '''command.
|-
|| Switch to terminal

Type''' cd Desktop/file-attr'''

Press '''Enter'''

Highlight the output

'''/Desktop/file-attr$d'''
|| Let us move to the code files folder '''file hyphen attr'''

provided along with the tutorial.

I have downloaded it to my '''Desktop'''.

Now switch to the terminal.

Type '''c d space Desktop slash file hyphen a t t r '''and press Enter. Notice that the prompt path has changed.
|-
|| Type

'''ls -l example1'''

and press''' Enter'''

'''Highlight the output'''

'''point to the first character'''
|| Let us type

'''l s space hyphen l space example1'''

and press '''Enter. '''

Observe the output.

The first character in the output shows the file type.

If it is a '''hyphen''', it denotes a regular file.

If it is '''l,''' it denotes a '''symbolic link'''.

If it is '''d''', it denotes a '''directory.'''

We see a hyphen here since example1 is a regular file.
|-
|| highlight the next 9 characters
|| The next nine characters show '''permissions'''.

First three denote '''owner''' permissions,

Next three denote '''group''' permissions,

Last three denote '''others''' permissions

Here each set contains '''r, '''and''' w,''' means '''read, '''and''' write'''.
|-
|| Highlight '''example1'''

highlight '''spoken'''
|| Here we can see that the owner of the file '''example1''' is '''spoken'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''chown command'''
* The''' chown''' command changes the ownership of a file or directory.
* This is an admin command.
* Only the root user can change the owner of a file or directory.

'''chown [options] ownername filename or directoryname'''
|| * The''' c h own''' command changes the ownership of a file or directory.
* This is an admin command.
* Only the root user can change the ownership of a file or directory.
* Here is the syntax of the '''c h own''' command.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''chown options'''
* -R: change permissions for all files in the current directory and its sub-directories.
* -c: report changes made to files.
* -f: prevent chown from displaying error messages.
|| The '''c h own''' command comes with various options like '''hyphen R, hyphen c, hyphen f''' and others.
|-
||
|| Now we will look at some examples.
|-
|| '''Type'''

'''sudo chown demo example1'''

press '''Enter'''.
|| Let us change the owner of the '''file''' '''example1'''.

Type '''sudo space ch own space demo space example1'''

press Enter.
|-
|| Type the sudo password if prompted.
|| Type the password if prompted again.
|-
|| Type

''' ls -l example1'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Let us see the file attributes of '''example'''1.

Type '''l s space hyphen l space example1''' and press Enter.

Observe that the new owner of the '''file''' is '''demo'''.

This works only if the user named '''demo''' exists.

Otherwise we will get an '''invalid user''' error.

Recall that we have given you an assignment in an earlier tutorial to create a user named''' demo'''.

If the user does not exist, please create the user.
|-
|| Type

'''mkdir pond'''

and press Enter.

Type the command

'''ls -l'''

press Enter

Highlight the pond directory details

highlight examples 1 to 5.
|| Now, we will see how to change the owner''' '''of a '''directory.'''

For that we will create a directory first.

Type '''m k dir space pond '''and press Enter.

To check, type '''l s space hyphen l '''and press Enter.

It displays a directory named''' pond''' and all the existing files examples.

Here we can see the owner of the directory '''pond''' is '''spoken'''
|-
|| Type

'''sudo chown -R demo pond '''
|| Let us change the owner of the directory''' pond''' to '''demo.'''

Type the following command and press '''Enter '''

Enter the sudo password, if required and press Enter again.
|-
|| Press '''Ctrl+L''' keys together.

Type '''ls -l '''and press '''Enter'''.
|| I will clear the screen by pressing '''Ctrl + L''' keys together for our convenience.

Now type,'''l s space hyphen l '''and press '''Enter'''

Here we can see the new owner of the directory '''pond''' is '''demo'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Changing File Permissions'''

ch mod command is used to change the permissions of a file or directory.

The name chmod stands for change mode.

Using chmod we can grant or remove permissions for owner, group and others.

read (r)

write (w)

execute (x)

The command modifies only the permissions, not the file contents or ownership.
|| '''ch mod''' command is used to change the permissions of a''' file '''or''' directory'''.

The name''' c h mod '''stands for change mode.

Using '''chmod '''we can add or remove permissions such as: '''read, write, execute'''.

These permissions can be changed''' '''for '''owner, group '''and '''others.'''

It does not modify the file contents or change ownership.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Syntax of chmod command'''

chmod [ugoa][+-=][rwx] file-or-directory
|| This is the syntax of the '''c h mod''' command.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Permissions using three-digit octal number'''

chmod [0-7][0-7][0-7] file_or_directory

Each digit represents:

1st digit → owner permissions

2nd digit → group permissions

3rd digit → others permissions

Permission values:

r = 4 (read)

w = 2 (write)

x = 1 (execute)
|| Alternatively, we can set permissions using a three digit octal number.
|-
|| Press Clear and press Enter.
|| Now, we will look at some examples of '''ch mod'''.

Let me clear the screen
|-
|| Type'''chmod u+x example2'''

press Enter
|| To add execute permission to the '''owner''' of the file '''example2''' type:'''ch mod space u plus x space example2 '''and''' '''press '''Enter.'''

This will add the execute permission to the owner of the file example2.
|-
|| type

''' ls -l example2

'''press '''Enter'''

highlight the permissions in the output
|| To check that, type

'''l s space hyphen l space example2'''

and press '''Enter''' to see the changes

It has assigned''' read, write''', and''' execute '''permissions to the '''owner.

'''read-only''' permissions to the '''group'''.

And '''read-only''' permission to '''others''', for the file example2.
|-
|| Type

'''chmod 751 example2

'''press Enter

type '''ls -l example2'''

and press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type the command

'''ch mod space 751 space example2

'''press '''Enter'''

This command gives the''' owner read, write''', and '''execute '''permissions.

To check type, '''ls space hyphen l space example2''' and press Enter.

'''Read''' and '''execute''' permissions to the '''group'''.

And '''execute-only '''permission to '''others '''for the file '''example2'''.
|-
|| type '''chmod a<nowiki>=</nowiki>r example2'''

and press '''Enter'''
|| To assign '''read-only''' permission to '''example2''' for everyone, type the following command:

'''ch mod space a equal to r space example2''' and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| type '''ls -l example2'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type the command,

'''l s space hyphen l space example2 '''

and press Enter.

Observe that the file '''example2''' has '''read-only '''permission for all users.
|-
|| Type '''chmod g+w example3 '''

and press Enter
|| Let’s add the write permissions to the group for file '''example3'''.

Type the command'''ch mod space g plus w space example3 '''

and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Type'''ls -l example3'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type,'''l s space hyphen l space example3'''

press '''Enter'''.

Note that the write permission has been added to the group.
|-
|| Type '''chmod a-w example3'''

press '''Enter'''
|| To remove the write permissions for all,type the command'''ch mod space a hyphen w space example3'''

press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Type

'''ls -l example3'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type, '''l s space hyphen l space example3'''

press Enter.

Observe that write permission for all has been removed
|-
|| '''Slide 12 '''

'''chgrp command'''

'''Ch-grp.png'''
||
* '''ch grp''' command changes the '''group ownership''' of a file or directory.
* Group members can then access it based on the set permissions'''.'''
* Only the owner of a file or a privileged user can change the group.
|-
|| '''Slide 13'''

'''Syntax of chgrp command'''
* The basic syntax of the ch grp command is:'''chgrp [options] group file'''
* To change the group of a directory and all its contents recursively:'''chgrp -R group directory'''
* Here, '''group''' is the new group name, and '''file''' or '''directory''' is the target.
||
* The basic syntax of the''' ch g r p''' command is:'''ch grp options group file.'''
* To change the group of a directory and all its contents recursively type:'''ch grp hyphen R group directory.'''
* Here, '''group''' is the new group name, and '''file''' or '''directory''' is the target.
|-
|| Switch to terminal

Press Clear and press Enter.

type

'''ls -l example4'''

press '''Enter'''

Highlight the permissions in the output
|| Let's look at some examples of '''ch grp''' commands.

Type the command,

'''l s space hyphen l space example4 '''

and press '''Enter.'''

Here we can see the group permission is given for the user '''spoken'''.
|-
|| Type '''sudo chgrp demo example4'''

press Enter
|| To change the group permission, type the command'''sudo space ch grp space demo space example4 '''press Enter. Enter the sudo password, if required.
|-
|| Type

'''ls -l example4'''

press '''Enter'''

Highlight the permissions in the output
|| Now type the command'''l s space hyphen l space example4'''

press '''Enter'''

Observe that the group has changed from '''spoken''' to '''demo'''
|-
|| '''Slide 14'''

'''Inode'''
|| An '''i node''' is a unique number that stores file or directory information.

Files are hard links to i nodes, which the system uses to access data.
|-
|| Switch to the terminal

type the command

'''ls -i example5'''

press Enter

Highlight the number in the output
|| We can use''' l s space hyphen i''' command to see the '''i node '''number of a file.

type the command,''' l s space hyphen i space example5'''

press '''Enter.'''

The number written before the file is the i node number of the file.

The '''i node''' number may vary for the users.
|-
|| '''Slide 15'''

'''Hard Links'''
|| A hard link is another name for an existing file.

Both files point to the same '''i node.'''

Since they share the same i node, they share the same data on disk.

The file is not copied, only a new filename is created.
|-
|| '''Slide 16'''

'''Inode and Hard Links'''
|| An i node can have multiple directory entries through hard links.

Hard links let multiple filenames point to the same i node.

To create links in Linux, we use the '''ln''' command.
|-
|| '''Slide 17'''

'''Syntax of ln'''

'''ln source link'''
|| The syntax of '''ln''' command to create a hard link is:

'''ln space source space link'''

The source is an existing file, and the link is the new filename.

Both files point to the same i node and share the same data.

Any change made to one file will reflect in the other file.
|-
|| Type: clear

and press enter

'''ln example2 exampleln'''

press Enter

Point to the command.
|| Now we will look at some examples of hard links

Let me clear the screen again.

Type the command,

'''l n space example2 space example l n'''

press Enter.

This command creates a hard link named '''exampleln''' to the file '''example2.'''
|-
|| Type '''ls -i example2 exampleln'''

press Enter

Highlight to the output
||

To display the i node number of both the files, type the command'''l s space hyphen i space example2 space exampleln'''

and press '''Enter.'''

The output shows that both files have the same i node number.

File '''exampleln''' is the hard link for file example2
|-
|| '''Slide 18'''

'''Soft Link'''
|| A soft link or a symbolic link is a special type of file.

It holds a reference to another file or directory.

This reference is an absolute or relative path.
|-
|| '''ln -s target-filename symbolic-filename'''
|| The syntax of''' l n command''' to create soft links is'''l n space hyphen s space target filename space symbolic filename.'''
|-
||
|| Now we will look at some examples of soft links.
|-
||

type '''ln -s example2 examplesoft''' press Enter
|| To create a soft link, type the command

'''l n space hyphen s space example2 space examplesoft '''and press Enter.
|-
|| type the command

''' ls -li example2 examplesoft '''press Enter
|| Now, let us display the i node number and list both the files.

Type the command,

'''l s space hyphen l i space example2 space examplesoft'''

press '''Enter.'''

Observe that the '''i node''' number of both the files is different.

'''examplesoft''' is a''' soft link''' of''' example2'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 19'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* Manage file ownership and permissions using '''chown''' and '''chmod''' commands.
* Change file group ownership using '''chgrp''' command.
* Describe '''inodes '''and view '''inode''' numbers of the files.
* Create and verify '''hard links '''and '''symbolic links''' in Linux.
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 20'''

'''Assignment'''
# Create a file named '''sample.txt'''.
# Display its permissions using the ls -l command.
# Change the permissions so that only the owner can read and write the file.
# Display the inode number of '''sample.txt'''.
|| As an Assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 21'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This '''Spoken Tutorial''' is brought to you by '''EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.'''Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Linux-File-Ownership-and-Permissions/English

2026-01-27T11:29:15Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title of the Script:''' '''Linux File Ownership and Permissions'''

'''Authors:''' '''Edupyramids'''

'''Keywords:''' Linux, File Ownership, File Permissions, chown, chmod, chgrp, Inodes, Hard link, Soft link, Symbolic link, Terminal commands, Linux file system, edupyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Linux File Ownership and Permissions.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Manage file ownership and permissions using '''c h own''' and '''c h mod''' commands.
* Change file group ownership using '''chgrp''' command.
* Describe '''i nodes '''and view '''i node''' numbers of the files.
* Create and verify '''hard links '''and '''symbolic links''' in Linux.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using:

'''Ubuntu O S version 24 point 04'''
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://EduPyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org] 
|| To follow this tutorial,

learners should have '''Ubuntu version 24 point 04.'''

For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.
# '''file-attr.zip'''
# '''fa-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''File Attributes'''

'''File-attributes.png'''
|| File attributes are properties linked to a file. Attributes define ownership and permissions.

They include file type, size, and time details. They show who owns the file and who can access it.

File attributes are viewed using the '''l s hyphen l '''command.
|-
|| Switch to terminal

Type''' cd Desktop/file-attr'''

Press '''Enter'''

Highlight the output

'''/Desktop/file-attr$d'''
|| Let us move to the code files folder '''file hyphen attr'''

provided along with the tutorial.

I have downloaded it to my '''Desktop'''.

Now switch to the terminal.

Type '''c d space Desktop slash file hyphen a t t r '''and press Enter. Notice that the prompt path has changed.
|-
|| Type

'''ls -l example1'''

and press''' Enter'''

'''Highlight the output'''

'''point to the first character'''
|| Let us type

'''l s space hyphen l space example1'''

and press '''Enter. '''

Observe the output.

The first character in the output shows the file type.

If it is a '''hyphen''', it denotes a regular file.

If it is '''l,''' it denotes a '''symbolic link'''.

If it is '''d''', it denotes a '''directory.'''

We see a hyphen here since example1 is a regular file.
|-
|| highlight the next 9 characters
|| The next nine characters show '''permissions'''.

First three denote '''owner''' permissions,

Next three denote '''group''' permissions,

Last three denote '''others''' permissions

Here each set contains '''r, '''and''' w,''' means '''read, '''and''' write'''.
|-
|| Highlight '''example1'''

highlight '''spoken'''
|| Here we can see that the owner of the file '''example1''' is '''spoken'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''chown command'''
* The''' chown''' command changes the ownership of a file or directory.
* This is an admin command.
* Only the root user can change the owner of a file or directory.

'''chown [options] ownername filename or directoryname'''
|| * The''' c h own''' command changes the ownership of a file or directory.
* This is an admin command.
* Only the root user can change the ownership of a file or directory.
* Here is the syntax of the '''c h own''' command.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''chown options'''
* -R: change permissions for all files in the current directory and its sub-directories.
* -c: report changes made to files.
* -f: prevent chown from displaying error messages.
|| The '''c h own''' command comes with various options like '''hyphen R, hyphen c, hyphen f''' and others.
|-
||
|| Now we will look at some examples.
|-
|| '''Type'''

'''sudo chown demo example1'''

press '''Enter'''.
|| Let us change the owner of the '''file''' '''example1'''.

Type '''sudo space ch own space demo space example1'''

press Enter.
|-
|| Type the sudo password if prompted.
|| Type the password if prompted again.
|-
|| Type

''' ls -l example1'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Let us see the file attributes of '''example'''1.

Type '''l s space hyphen l space example1''' and press Enter.

Observe that the new owner of the '''file''' is '''demo'''.

This works only if the user named '''demo''' exists.

Otherwise we will get an '''invalid user''' error.

Recall that we have given you an assignment in an earlier tutorial to create a user named''' demo'''.

If the user does not exist, please create the user.
|-
|| Type

'''mkdir pond'''

and press Enter.

Type the command

'''ls -l'''

press Enter

Highlight the pond directory details

highlight examples 1 to 5.
|| Now, we will see how to change the owner''' '''of a '''directory.'''

For that we will create a directory first.

Type '''m k dir space pond '''and press Enter.

To check, type '''l s space hyphen l '''and press Enter.

It displays a directory named''' pond''' and all the existing files examples.

Here we can see the owner of the directory '''pond''' is '''spoken'''
|-
|| Type

'''sudo chown -R demo pond '''
|| Let us change the owner of the directory''' pond''' to '''demo.'''

Type the following command and press '''Enter '''

Enter the sudo password, if required and press Enter again.
|-
|| Press '''Ctrl+L''' keys together.

Type '''ls -l '''and press '''Enter'''.
|| I will clear the screen by pressing '''Ctrl + L''' keys together for our convenience.

Now type,'''l s space hyphen l '''and press '''Enter'''

Here we can see the new owner of the directory '''pond''' is '''demo'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Changing File Permissions'''

ch mod command is used to change the permissions of a file or directory.

The name chmod stands for change mode.

Using chmod we can grant or remove permissions for owner, group and others.

read (r)

write (w)

execute (x)

The command modifies only the permissions, not the file contents or ownership.
|| '''ch mod''' command is used to change the permissions of a''' file '''or''' directory'''.

The name''' c h mod '''stands for change mode.

Using '''chmod '''we can add or remove permissions such as: '''read, write, execute'''.

These permissions can be changed''' '''for '''owner, group '''and '''others.'''

It does not modify the file contents or change ownership.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Syntax of chmod command'''

chmod [ugoa][+-=][rwx] file-or-directory
|| This is the syntax of the '''c h mod''' command.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Permissions using three-digit octal number'''

chmod [0-7][0-7][0-7] file_or_directory

Each digit represents:

1st digit → owner permissions

2nd digit → group permissions

3rd digit → others permissions

Permission values:

r = 4 (read)

w = 2 (write)

x = 1 (execute)
|| Alternatively, we can set permissions using a three digit octal number.
|-
|| Press Clear and press Enter.
|| Now, we will look at some examples of '''ch mod'''.

Let me clear the screen
|-
|| Type'''chmod u+x example2'''

press Enter
|| To add execute permission to the '''owner''' of the file '''example2''' type:'''ch mod space u plus x space example2 '''and''' '''press '''Enter.'''

This will add the execute permission to the owner of the file example2.
|-
|| type

''' ls -l example2

'''press '''Enter'''

highlight the permissions in the output
|| To check that, type

'''l s space hyphen l space example2'''

and press '''Enter''' to see the changes

It has assigned''' read, write''', and''' execute '''permissions to the '''owner.

'''read-only''' permissions to the '''group'''.

And '''read-only''' permission to '''others''', for the file example2.
|-
|| Type

'''chmod 751 example2

'''press Enter

type '''ls -l example2'''

and press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type the command

'''ch mod space 751 space example2

'''press '''Enter'''

This command gives the''' owner read, write''', and '''execute '''permissions.

To check type, '''ls space hyphen l space example2''' and press Enter.

'''Read''' and '''execute''' permissions to the '''group'''.

And '''execute-only '''permission to '''others '''for the file '''example2'''.
|-
|| type '''chmod a<nowiki>=</nowiki>r example2'''

and press '''Enter'''
|| To assign '''read-only''' permission to '''example2''' for everyone, type the following command:

'''ch mod space a equal to r space example2''' and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| type '''ls -l example2'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type the command,

'''l s space hyphen l space example2 '''

and press Enter.

Observe that the file '''example2''' has '''read-only '''permission for all users.
|-
|| Type '''chmod g+w example3 '''

and press Enter
|| Let’s add the write permissions to the group for file '''example3'''.

Type the command'''ch mod space g plus w space example3 '''

and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Type'''ls -l example3'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type,'''l s space hyphen l space example3'''

press '''Enter'''.

Note that the write permission has been added to the group.
|-
|| Type '''chmod a-w example3'''

press '''Enter'''
|| To remove the write permissions for all,type the command'''ch mod space a hyphen w space example3'''

press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Type

'''ls -l example3'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type, '''l s space hyphen l space example3'''

press Enter.

Observe that write permission for all has been removed
|-
|| '''Slide 12 '''

'''chgrp command'''

'''Ch-grp.png'''
||
* '''ch grp''' command changes the '''group ownership''' of a file or directory.
* Group members can then access it based on the set permissions'''.'''
* Only the owner of a file or a privileged user can change the group.
|-
|| '''Slide 13'''

'''Syntax of chgrp command'''
* The basic syntax of the ch grp command is:'''chgrp [options] group file'''
* To change the group of a directory and all its contents recursively:'''chgrp -R group directory'''
* Here, '''group''' is the new group name, and '''file''' or '''directory''' is the target.
||
* The basic syntax of the''' ch g r p''' command is:'''ch grp options group file.'''
* To change the group of a directory and all its contents recursively type:'''ch grp hyphen R group directory.'''
* Here, '''group''' is the new group name, and '''file''' or '''directory''' is the target.
|-
|| Switch to terminal

Press Clear and press Enter.

type

'''ls -l example4'''

press '''Enter'''

Highlight the permissions in the output
|| Let's look at some examples of '''ch grp''' commands.

Type the command,

'''l s space hyphen l space example4 '''

and press '''Enter.'''

Here we can see the group permission is given for the user '''spoken'''.
|-
|| Type '''sudo chgrp demo example4'''

press Enter
|| To change the group permission, type the command'''sudo space ch grp space demo space example4 '''press Enter. Enter the sudo password, if required.
|-
|| Type

'''ls -l example4'''

press '''Enter'''

Highlight the permissions in the output
|| Now type the command'''l s space hyphen l space example4'''

press '''Enter'''

Observe that the group has changed from '''spoken''' to '''demo'''
|-
|| '''Slide 14'''

'''Inode'''
|| An '''i node''' is a unique number that stores file or directory information.

Files are hard links to i nodes, which the system uses to access data.
|-
|| Switch to the terminal

type the command

'''ls -i example5'''

press Enter

Highlight the number in the output
|| We can use''' l s space hyphen i''' command to see the '''i node '''number of a file.

type the command,''' l s space hyphen i space example5'''

press '''Enter.'''

The number written before the file is the i node number of the file.

The '''i node''' number may vary for the users.
|-
|| '''Slide 15'''

'''Hard Links'''
|| A hard link is another name for an existing file.

Both files point to the same '''i node.'''

Since they share the same i node, they share the same data on disk.

The file is not copied, only a new filename is created.
|-
|| '''Slide 16'''

'''Inode and Hard Links'''
|| An i node can have multiple directory entries through hard links.

Hard links let multiple filenames point to the same i node.

To create links in Linux, we use the '''ln''' command.
|-
|| '''Slide 17'''

'''Syntax of ln'''

'''ln source link'''
|| The syntax of '''ln''' command to create a hard link is:

'''ln space source space link'''

The source is an existing file, and the link is the new filename.

Both files point to the same i node and share the same data.

Any change made to one file will reflect in the other file.
|-
|| Type: clear

and press enter

'''ln example2 exampleln'''

press Enter

Point to the command.
|| Now we will look at some examples of hard links

Let me clear the screen again.

Type the command,

'''l n space example2 space example l n'''

press Enter.

This command creates a hard link named '''exampleln''' to the file '''example2.'''
|-
|| Type '''ls -i example2 exampleln'''

press Enter

Highlight to the output
||

To display the i node number of both the files, type the command'''l s space hyphen i space example2 space exampleln'''

and press '''Enter.'''

The output shows that both files have the same i node number.

File '''exampleln''' is the hard link for file example2
|-
|| '''Slide 18'''

'''Soft Link'''
|| A soft link or a symbolic link is a special type of file.

It holds a reference to another file or directory.

This reference is an absolute or relative path.
|-
|| '''ln -s target-filename symbolic-filename'''
|| The syntax of''' l n command''' to create soft links is'''l n space hyphen s space target hyphen filename space symbolic hyphen filename.'''
|-
||
|| Now we will look at some examples of soft links.
|-
||

type '''ln -s example2 examplesoft''' press Enter
|| To create a soft link, type the command

'''l n space hyphen s space example2 space examplesoft '''and press Enter.
|-
|| type the command

''' ls -li example2 examplesoft '''press Enter
|| Now, let us display the i node number and list both the files.

Type the command,

'''l s space hyphen l i space example2 space examplesoft'''

press '''Enter.'''

Observe that the '''i node''' number of both the files is different.

'''examplesoft''' is a''' soft link''' of''' example2'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 19'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* Manage file ownership and permissions using '''chown''' and '''chmod''' commands.
* Change file group ownership using '''chgrp''' command.
* Describe '''inodes '''and view '''inode''' numbers of the files.
* Create and verify '''hard links '''and '''symbolic links''' in Linux.
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 20'''

'''Assignment'''
# Create a file named '''sample.txt'''.
# Display its permissions using the ls -l command.
# Change the permissions so that only the owner can read and write the file.
# Display the inode number of '''sample.txt'''.
|| As an Assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 21'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This '''Spoken Tutorial''' is brought to you by '''EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.'''Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Simple-Filters-in-Linux/English

2026-01-26T14:30:23Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''TITLE: Simple Filters in Linux''' '''Author:''' EduPyramids '''Keywords:''' head, tail, sort, cut, paste, Linux, command line, text manipulation, edupyramids, video tu..."

'''TITLE: Simple Filters in Linux'''

'''Author:''' EduPyramids

'''Keywords:''' head, tail, sort, cut, paste, Linux, command line, text manipulation, edupyramids, video tutorial.

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| Slide 1

'''Title Slide'''

|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Simple Filters in Linux'''.
|-
||'''Slide 2 Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to,
* Display specific lines with head and tail commands.
* Sort files in ascending and descending order
* Extract and manipulate columns using cut and paste commands

|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''

|| To record this tutorial, I am using * '''Ubuntu OS '''version 24 point 04

|-
|| '''Slide 4Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]

|| To follow this tutorial,

Learners should have '''Ubuntu version 24 point 04'''

For the prerequisite of '''Linux''' tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.
# '''marks.txt'''
# '''numbers.txt'''
# '''sf-commands.txt'''

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.

|-
||
|| Let us begin with terminal prompt symbols and their meanings.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Terminal Prompt Symbols'''

* $ prompt indicates a normal user.
* Commands can be run without administrative privileges at the $ prompt.
* <nowiki># prompt indicates that root privileges are required.</nowiki>
* Switching to root can be done using '''sudo su '''or '''su root.'''

||
* The dollar prompt indicates a normal user.
* Commands can be run without administrative privileges at the dollar prompt.
* The hash prompt indicates that root privileges are required.
* Switching to root can be done using '''sudo su '''or '''su root.'''

|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''head command'''

|| The '''head''' command in Linux is used to display the beginning of a file.

By default, it shows the first ten lines of a file on the terminal.

It helps us to quickly preview file contents without opening the entire file.

To use the head command,type '''head''' followed by the name of an '''ASCII''' file.
|-
||
|| Let’s use '''numbers.txt''' file given in the code files folder to explain head command.

Please download it for practising.
|-
|| Show the '''numbers.txt '''file opened.
|| I have opened the '''numbers.txt '''file
|-
|| Press Ctrl + Alt+ T Keys.
|| Next, let us open the Terminal.
|-
|| Type''' ls '''and press '''Enter'''.

Point to '''numbers.txt '''file
|| Type''' ls''' at the prompt and press '''Enter'''.

We see that the file '''numbers.txt''' is listed in the home folder.
|-
|| Type '''cat''' '''num''' and press the '''Tab''' key.

point to the output.
|| Type '''cat space''' '''num''' and press the '''Tab''' key.

This will auto-complete the file name to '''numbers.txt'''.Press '''Enter''' to display the full contents of the file in the terminal.
|-
||
|| Let us check with the head command.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''head num '''

press the '''Tab''' key and press Enter.
|| Type '''head space num''' and press the '''Tab''' key

Press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Show the output
|| The head command displays the first ten lines of the file.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

Type: '''head -n5 numbers.txt'''

'''highlight -n5'''

press '''Enter'''.

Show the output

Note: head -n5 or head -5 work the same way.
|| Let’s use the option '''hyphen n''' to display a specific number of lines.

Type '''head''' '''space''' '''hyphen n 5 space numbers dot t x t'''

Here '''n''' is a number.

Let us use''' n''' as '''5''' and run the command.

This displays just the first 5 lines of the file instead of all its contents.
|-
||
|| Now let us learn about the tail command.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''tail command'''

* The tail command in Linux is used to display the ending part of a file.
* By default, it shows the last 10 lines of a file on the terminal.
* It is commonly used to monitor log files or view the most recent updates.

|| The '''tail''' command works exactly opposite to the '''head''' command.

By default, it displays the last 10 lines of a file.

It is commonly used to monitor log files or view the most recent updates.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''Type: tail numbers.txt'''
|| Let us try the tail command on numbers '''dot t x t file'''.

Type '''tail space numbers dot t x t''' and press '''Enter'''.

The last 10 lines of the file are displayed on the terminal.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''tail -n5 numbers.txt'''
|| Now at the terminal''' '''type: '''tail space hyphen n five space numbers dot t x t '''

'''hyphen n''' option with '''tail''' shows a specific number of lines from the end of a file.

and press '''Enter'''.

Only the last 5 lines of '''numbers.txt file''' are displayed on the screen.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Log Files'''

log-file.png

|| Now let’s learn about a log file.

A log file records events that occur on a system.

It includes system messages, application activities and security-related actions.

Log files help monitor system behaviour and fix problems.

The '''auth.log''' file maintains logs of authentication events on the system.

It records user logins, logouts and failed login attempts.

This file helps track user access and detect unauthorized attempts.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Options in '''tail''' command'''

|| tail with '''hyphen f'''

.''' '''option follows a file in real time.

'''tail hyphen f'''

.''' '''updates the output automatically as new lines are added to the file.

It is useful for monitoring log files like '''auth dot log'''.

It helps to track system and authentication events live.

When new data arrives, it prints it immediately.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''tail -f /var/log/auth.log '''and press '''Enter'''.

|| Type this command and press '''Enter'''.

The command does not exit, it waits for new lines to be added to the file.

When new data arrives, it prints it immediately.
|-
|| click the + icon to open another terminal.
|| Now, let us open another Terminal window.
|-
|| Show 2 terminal windows, side by side.
|| This helps us see how the '''tail''' command follows the last line of a log file in real time.
|-
|| Type''' su spoken '''and press '''Enter.'''
|| Now, let us switch the user.

Type '''su''' followed by your username at the prompt .

I will type''' su space spoken''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Show the prompt.

Enter a wrong password and press '''Enter'''.
|| You will be prompted for a password.

Enter a wrong password and press '''Enter'''.

The system denies login and shows an authentication failure message.

This means the password is incorrect.
|-
|| show the log file entry on another window

Point to the date and time.
|| You will now see that the terminal running the tail command is automatically updated with a new log entry. The log shows the '''date and time''' when the authentication failure occurred.
|-
|| Type '''date''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Now, let us verify the system date and time. Type '''date '''and press '''Enter'''.

The terminal displays the current '''system date and time'''.

This corresponds to the timestamp shown in the authentication log.
|-
|| Type: '''exit''' and press Enter, to close the terminal
|| Type '''exit''' to close the new terminal.
|-
|| Press '''Ctrl '''and''' C''' keys

close the new terminal.
|| Press '''Ctrl '''and''' C''' keys to stop the running tail command.
|-
|| Point to the '''auth.log''' command on the terminal.
|| In the previous example, we looked only at the '''auth.log '''file.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Log Files '''

log files1.png

'''/var/log/messages : General system messages and information'''

'''/var/log/auth.log : Authentication logs'''

'''/var/log/kern.log : Kernel logs'''

'''/var/log/cron.log : Cron daemon logs (scheduled jobs)'''

'''/var/log/maillog : Mail server logs'''

'''/var/log/httpd/ : Apache access and error logs directory'''

'''/var/log/mysqld.log : MySQL database server log '''file
|| * Here are some commonly used log files in Linux.
* A Linux system administrator examines log files to gather information.
* This helps to troubleshoot the system when problems arise.

|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''sort''' command

|| Now we will learn about sort command.* The '''sort '''command arranges lines in a text file.
* It sorts data alphabetically or numerically in ascending and descending order.
* Input can be from a file or standard input.
* The sorted output is shown on the terminal.

|-
|| Type''' sort numbers.txt''' and press''' Enter.'''
|| Type: '''sort space numbers dot t x t and press Enter.'''

This sorts the file in ascending order by default.
|-
|| Point to the output.
|| Notice something interesting here:

The sort command, by default, sorts lines lexicographically, looking at the first character.

So numbers like 10, 11, and 12 appear before 2.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''sort -n numbers.txt'''

Show the output
|| To avoid this, add the '''hyphen n '''option and press Enter.

Now, the '''sort''' command looks at the entire number while sorting.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''sort -rn numbers.txt'''
|| To sort numbers in reverse order, add the '''hyphen r n''' option to the '''sort''' command.

We see the output in the reverse order.
|-
|| '''point to the numbers in the output.'''

'''Type at the command prompt'''

'''sort -run numbers.txt'''

highlight '''u''' in the command.
|| This file contains repeated numbers.

To extract only the unique numbers, let us add the '''hyphen u''' option.

|-
|| Show the output.

Show the earlier output for comparison.

Scroll up to show the output.

Point to the output
|| Now we only see the unique numbers displayed as the output.

Earlier, two 2s and two 7s were displayed.

Now, only one 2 and one 7 are displayed.
|-
||
|| Now, let us see how to sort a file based on a specific column.
|-
|| Show the marks.txt file.
|| file given the code files link.
|-
||
|| Let us sort the '''marks.txt''' file based on the second column.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''sort marks.txt -t " " -k2'''

|| Type this command and press Enter

Here, '''hyphen t''' specifies the delimiter and the space inside the quotes represents a space character.

The '''hyphen k 2''' option indicates that the sort should be performed on the second column.

Press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| '''Type'''

'''cat marks.txt '''and''' '''press''' Enter'''

|| '''Type cat space marks dot t x t '''and''' '''press''' Enter.'''
|-
||

Point to Avir and Bala
|| This is the original file.Notice that '''Avir''' has moved up.'''Bala''' has moved down after sorting by the second column.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

'''cut''' command

The '''cut''' command in Linux is used to extract specific sections from each line of a file.

It can select data based on '''characters''', '''fields''', or '''byte positions'''.

The cut command reads input from a file or standard input.

The selected output is displayed on the terminal.
|| Now learn about the '''cut''' command.

The '''cut''' command is used to extract specific information from each line of a file.

It can select data based on '''characters''', '''fields''', or '''byte positions'''.

The cut command reads input from a file or standard input.

The selected output is displayed on the terminal.
|-
||
|| Let us extract the names from '''marks.txt'''.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''cut marks.txt -d " " -f2'''

cut space marks dot txt d double-quotes space double-quotes minus f2
|| Type the following command and press '''Enter'''.Here '''hyphen d''' specifies the delimiter.

The space inside quotes represents the delimiter.'''hyphen f 2''' selects the second column.

The output displays only the second column

|-
|| '''Slide 13'''

'''paste''' command

The '''paste''' command in Linux is used to merge lines from two or more files.

It joins corresponding lines side by side, using a delimiter.

By default, the delimiter is a tab character.

The output is displayed on the terminal.

|| * The '''paste''' command in Linux is used to merge lines from two or more files.
* It joins corresponding lines side by side, using a delimiter.
* By default, the delimiter is a tab character.
* The output is displayed on the terminal.

|-
||
|| Let us use both the''' numbers.txt '''and '''marks.txt''' file now.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''paste numbers.txt marks.txt'''

'''paste''' space numbers dot txt space marks dot txt
|| Type this command and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Show the output
|| Now the first line of '''marks.txt''' has been appended to '''numbers.txt''' file.The '''marks dot t x t '''file has been appended to '''numbers dot t x t''' file.
|-
|| Type at the command prompt

'''paste numbers.txt marks.txt > concatfile.txt'''

type '''cat concatfile.txt '''
|| We can use the redirect operator to send this output to a '''concatfile.txt'''.

Press the '''Up Arrow''' key.Type the redirect operator( >) followed by '''concatfile.txt''' Press '''Enter'''.

Now the output is redirected to a file named '''concatfile.txt'''.

Type, '''cat space concatfile.txt''' and Press '''Enter'''.

We can see the paste command results are saved in this file.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''paste -s numbers.txt '''and''' '''press''' Enter.'''

|| To print numbers serially with tab delimiters, use the '''hyphen''' '''s''' option with '''paste'''.

Type

'''paste space hyphen s space numbers dot t x t '''and''' '''press''' Enter.'''

|-
|| point to the output.
|| We can see the output on the terminal with a tab space in between the numbers.
|-
|| '''Slide''' 14

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to:* Display specific lines with head and tail commands
* Sort files in ascending and descending order
* Extract and manipulate columns using cut and paste commands

|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 15'''

As an assignment# Use '''head''' and '''tail '''commands to display specific lines of a file.
# Sort numbers.txt in reverse numeric order and extract unique values.
# Use cut and paste to manipulate columns in marks.txt.

| | As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 16 Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids educational services private limited SINE IIT Bombay.Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C3/Text-Editing-using-sed/English

2026-01-26T12:01:13Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with " '''Title of script''': ''' Text Editing using sed''' '''Author: EduPyramids''' '''Keywords: sed, substitute, insert, delete, global substitution, g flag, case-insensitive, co..."

'''Title of script''': ''' Text Editing using sed'''
'''Author: EduPyramids'''
'''Keywords: sed, substitute, insert, delete, global substitution, g flag, case-insensitive, context addressing, Video Tutorial.'''

{| border=1
| | '''Visual Cue'''
| | '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''
'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Text Editing using sed'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2 Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:* Perform text substitution using '''sed '''command.
* Use the '''g''' flag for global substitution.
* Execute multiple '''sed''' commands using the '''hyphen e''' option.
* Apply substitution based on context.
* Insert and remove lines from a file.
* Redirect '''sed '''output to an output file.

|-
|| '''Slide 3'''
'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using* '''Ubuntu OS '''version 24 point 04
* '''Bash''' version 5 point 1 point 16;
|-
|| '''Slide 4 Pre-requisites'''
https://EduPyramids.org
|| Learners should have* '''Ubuntu version 24 point 04 '''and
* '''Bash version 5 '''point '''1 '''point '''16'''
* For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''
'''Code files'''
The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.# '''seddemo.txt'''
# '''sed-commands.txt'''
These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.
These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
| | Let us run some examples of sed commands using the terminal.
|-
|| Type
'''cat seddemo.txtpress Enter'''
Highlight the word kumar in the lines.Point to the fourth and sixth lines
|| Let us first view the contents of the file '''sed demo dot t x t.'''
Notice the word '''Kumar'''.
It appears twice in the fourth line and once in the sixth line.
|-
|| Type
'''sed 's/[kK]umar/Roy/' seddemo.txt'''
|| Let’s suppose we want to substitute '''Kumar''' with '''Roy.'''
Type the following command and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Highlight one by one
'''sed'''
'''s'''
'''[kK]umar'''
'''Roy'''
'''forward slashes'''
'''seddemo.txt'''
|| Let us understand this command.

'''sed''' is the stream editor.
The letter '''s''' stands for substitution.
This pattern matches bothuppercase '''Kumar''' and lowercase '''kumar'''.
The word '''Roy''' is the replacement text.
The forward slashes separate the pattern and the replacement.
The file '''sed demo dot txt''' is the input file.
|-
|| Press '''Enter'''.
Show the output on the terminal
||
In the output, the word '''Kumar''' is replaced with '''Roy'''.
|-
||
Show the output on the terminal and the file '''seddemo.txt''' opened next to it
Highlight 4th line of both output and in the file
|| But only the first occurrence of the word '''Kumar''' is replaced in each line.
This happens because, by default, '''sed''' substitutes only the first match in a line.
Note the substitution happens only on the terminal output.
The original file '''sed demo dot t x t '''is not modified.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Global Substitution'''
* '''By default, sed replaces only the first match in each line.'''
* '''To replace all occurrences in a line, we use the g flag.'''
* '''The letter g stands for global substitution.'''
* '''When the g flag is used, sed searches the entire line for matches.'''
* '''Every matching pattern in that line is replaced.'''
* '''The g flag is written after the substitution command.'''
'''General syntax:'''
'''sed 's/pattern/replacement/g' filename'''
|| * By default, '''sed''' replaces only the first match in each line.
* To replace all occurrences in a line, we use the '''g''' flag.
* The letter '''g''' stands for global substitution.
* When the '''g''' flag is used, '''sed''' searches the entire line for matches.
* Every matching pattern in that line is replaced.
* The '''g''' flag is written after the substitution command.
This is the general syntax.
|-
|| Type
'''sed 's/[kK]umar/Roy/g' seddemo.txt'''
'''Press Enter'''

'''Highlight the output'''
|| Type this command and press '''Enter.'''
Output shows, both occurrences in the fourth line are replaced.
|-
|| Type
'''sed 's/kumar/Roy/Ig' seddemo.txt'''
=== and press Enter.Case-insensitive matching ===
|| Type the following command and press '''Enter.'''
Instead of specifying lowercase and uppercase letters using brackets, we can use the '''I option'''.
The '''I''' option makes the pattern match '''case insensitive'''.
Observe that the output is the same as the previous command.
Both methods can be used to produce the same result.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''
'''Multiple Substitutions using -e'''
* sed allows performing more than one operation in a single command.
* The -e option is used to specify multiple sed expressions.
* Each -e represents one sed command.
* Commands are executed in the order they are written.
* This is useful when multiple substitutions are required on the same input.

|| * '''sed '''allows performing more than one operation in a single command.
* The '''hyphen e '''option is used to specify multiple '''sed''' expressions.
* Each '''hyphen e '''represents one '''sed '''command.
* Commands are executed in the order they are written.
* This is useful when multiple substitutions are required on the same input.
|-
||
|| Let us see how to replace '''electronics''' with '''electrical '''and '''civil''' with '''metallurgy.'''
|-
|| Type
'''sed -e 's/electronics/electrical/g' -e 's/civil/metallurgy/g' seddemo.txt'''
| | Type this command.
|-
||
|| Let us understand this code.
* '''hyphen e''' allows using more than one '''sed''' command in a single line.
* '''s slash electronics slash electrical slash g '''replaces all occurrences of '''electronics''' with '''electrical.'''
* '''s slash civil slash metallurgy slash g '''replaces all occurrences of '''civil'''with '''metallurgy.'''

|-
|| press '''Enter'''

Highlight the replaced words in the output
|| Now, press '''Enter'''.
Observe that words are replaced.
|-
| | '''Context-Based Substitution'''
|| Let’s change the '''stream''' of '''Anirban '''from '''computers''' to '''mathematics'''.
|-
|| Type
'''sed '/Anirban/s/computers/mathematics/g' seddemo.txt'''
|| Type this command and press '''Enter'''.
Observe that computers is changed to mathematics.
|-
| | '''Deleting Lines using sed'''
|| Let us see how to remove all lines containing the word '''electronics'''.
In other words, select those lines which do not have an electronics stream.
|-
|| Type

'''sed '/electronics/d' seddemo.txt > nonElectronics.txt'''
| | Type this command.
|-
||
'''Highlight'''
'''/electronics/'''
'''d'''
'''seddemo.txt'''
'''>'''
'''nonElectronics.txt'''
|| Here, '''slash electronics slash''' is a context address that matches lines containing electronics.
'''d '''means deletes the matched lines
'''seddemo dot t x t '''is the input file.
greater than means redirects output to a file
'''non Electronics dot t x t''' is the output file.
Press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| '''Type cat nonElectronics.txt'''
'''press Enter'''
'''Show the output'''
|| Let us view the contents of the new file '''nonElectronics'''.
The file shows only those records that are not in the electronics stream.
You may wonder why substitutions are not reflected in the text file.
This is because all substitution results are displayed only on the terminal.
The original text file is not modified unless explicitly instructed.
|-
| | '''Inserting Lines Using sed'''
| | Suppose we want to insert a line at the beginning of the file.
|-
|| Type
'''sed '1i Student Information' seddemo.txt'''
| | Type this command.
|-
|| Highlight one by one
'''1'''
'''i'''
'''Student Information'''
|| Here:
• 1 is the line number• i is the insert command
• '''Student Information '''is the text to be inserted
|-
|| Press Enter.
Highlight the line:
'''Student Information'''
|| Press '''Enter.'''
Output shows the line '''Student Information''' inserted at the beginning of the file.
|-
| | '''Inserting Multiple Lines'''
|| Let us see how to insert more than one line in the file '''seddemo dot t x t'''.
'''Student Information''' in the first line and '''2026''' in the next line.
|-
|| Type
'''sed '1i Student Information\n2026\nRecords' seddemo.txtpress Enter'''
|| Now let us type this command.
Press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Point to '''\n'''
|| Notice '''backslash n '''between the string '''Information''' and '''2026'''.
'''backslash n '''moves to a new line and prints '''2026 '''in the next line after '''Student Information'''.
Similarly after 2026, new string '''Records''' is printed in the third line.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''
'''Summary'''
In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* Perform text substitution using '''sed '''command
* Use the '''g''' flag for global substitution
* Execute multiple '''sed''' commands using the '''-e''' option
* Apply substitution based on context

* Insert and remove lines from a file
* Redirect '''sed '''output to an output file
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.
Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''
As an assignment please do the following:* Using '''sed '''and the file '''seddemo.txt''', replace the word '''computers''' with '''computer-science'''.
* Replace '''electronics''' with '''ece''' in all occurrences.
* Perform both substitutions in a single command using the '''-e option'''.
* Delete all lines that belong to the '''civil''' department.
#
| | As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 10
Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C3/Mastering-grep/English

2026-01-26T11:40:23Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''TITLE: Mastering Grep''' '''Author:''' EduPyramids''' '''Keywords:''' grep, search, pattern matching, regular expressions, extended regex, case-insensitive search, cha..."

'''TITLE: Mastering Grep'''

'''Author:''' EduPyramids'''

'''Keywords:''' grep, search, pattern matching, regular expressions, extended regex, case-insensitive search, character classes, anchors, dot operator, asterisk operator, Linux, Ubuntu, Bash, text search, EduPyramids, video tutorial.

{| border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| Slide 1

'''Title Slide'''

|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Mastering grep'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2 '''
Learning Objectives'''

In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Match more than one pattern
* Check a word that has a different spelling
* Character classes
* Use of '''*''' operators
* Match any one character using dot
* Match a pattern at the beginning and ending of a line.
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Match more than one pattern.
* Check a word that has a different spelling.
* Character classes.
* Use of '''asterisk''' operators.
* Match any one character using a dot.
* Match a pattern at the beginning and ending of a line

|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''

|| To record this tutorial, I am using:

'''Ubuntu OS '''version 24 point zero 4.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]

|| To follow this tutorial,

Learners should have '''Ubuntu '''version 24 point zero 4.

And should be familiar with basic Linux terminal commands.

For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

'''grepdemo.txt'''

'''grep-commands.txt'''
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.

|-
||
|| Let us get started with grep commands.
|-
|| '''Note: Please type the commands on the terminal don't paste as the double quotes are wrong.'''

Type '''grep -e "electronics” -e "civil" grepdemo.txt '''Press '''Enter'''.
|| Let us get the details of students from the Civil or Electronics stream.

We will use the same example file, '''grep demo dot t x t'''.

We can match multiple patterns using the '''hyphen e''' option in '''grep'''.

Type this command and press '''Enter'''.

Output displays both the civil and electronics students records.
|-
|| Type '''grep -ie “choudhury” -ie “chowdhari” grepdemo.txt '''Press '''Enter'''

Type''' clear and press Enter.'''
|| Now we wish to search for people whose title is Choudhury.

The issue is that the title may be spelled in different ways.

How can we handle this?

In such cases, we can perform a case-insensitive search using the '''hyphen i '''option.

We can as well combine it with multiple '''hyphen e''' options.

This helps to match different spellings of the same word. Type this command and press''' Enter.'''

The output is displayed. However, there can be many other ways to write the name.

We could use many -e options, but a better solution is Regular Expressions.

Let me clear the screen.
|-
||
|| There are several special characters used in regular expressions.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''charcter-class.png'''

'''Character class'''

|| A character class is a part of a regular expression.

It allows us to define a group of characters inside square brackets.

When a pattern is matched, only one character from this group is selected.

For example, square bracket '''a b c '''matches either '''a''', '''b''', or '''c'''.

The pattern square bracket zero to nine matches any one digit from zero to nine.

Square bracket a to z matches any one lowercase letter.

Character classes are useful when more than one character is allowed.

To specify a larger range, we use the format: first character hyphen last character.

For example, [0-9] matches any digit.

Only one character from the range is matched at a time.
|-
||
|| Let us look at some examples.
|-
|| In terminal type '''grep -i “ch[ao][uw]dh[ua]r[yi]”'''

'''grepdemo.txt'''

Press '''Enter Add annotation for this'''
|| To understand character class type this command and press '''Enter'''.

Observe the output.

This matches most variations of the name chowdhury spelt differently.

However, it still does not match '''choudhuree''' with double '''e'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''The asterisk (*) operator'''

The '''* operator''' is a regular expression operator.

It matches zero or more repetitions of the preceding character or pattern.

This allows us to match repeated characters, or even when the character is absent.

For example, ab* matches a, ab, abb, abbb, and so on.
|| The asterisk operator is a regular expression operator.

It matches zero or more repetitions of the preceding character or pattern.

This allows matching repeated characters or cases where the character is absent.

For example, the pattern ab asterisk (*) matches a, ab, abb, abbb, and so on.

|-
|| Type:

'''grep -i “m[ei]*ra*” grepdemo.txt''' press '''Enter'''

|| Let us match a student's name Mira in the file.

Type this command and press '''Enter''' to see the output.

We see records of Mira with 3 different spellings here.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''The Dot Operator'''

In regular expressions, the '''dot (.) operator''' is a special character.

It matches '''any single character''', except the newline character.

For example:* a.c matches abc, a1c, or a_c
* It does not match '''ac''' because one character is required between''' a''' and '''c'''

The '''dot operator''' is used when the character is unknown but its position is fixed.
|| The '''dot''' is a special character in regular expressions.

It matches any single character, except the newline character.

For example, the pattern '''a dot c '''can match '''a b c''', '''a 1 c''', or '''a underscore c'''.

However, it will not match '''a c''', because one character must appear between '''a''' and '''c'''.

The '''dot operator''' is used when the character is unknown but its position is fixed.
|-
|| Type '''grep "M… " grepdemo.txt'''

press '''Enter'''
|| For example, type this command and press '''Enter'''.

It searches for four letter words that start with '''M'''.

Each dot matches one character.

The space after the dots ensures only four-letter matches.

This avoids matching words longer than four letters.

The output shows records for students '''Mani''' and '''Mira'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Anchors (^ and $)'''

An '''anchor''' is a special symbol in regular expressions.

It specifies where a pattern should match in a line.

It does not match any character, it matches only a position.

The two most common anchors are''' ^ '''and '''$'''.

To match a pattern at the beginning of a line, we use the caret ^ symbol.

To match a pattern at the end of a line, we use the dollar sign '''$'''.
|| An anchor is a special symbol used in regular expressions.

It specifies where a pattern should match in a line.

Anchors do not match any character, they match only a position.

The two most common anchors are the '''caret''' and the '''dollar''' sign. We use '''caret''' to match a pattern at the beginning of a line.

We use dollar to match a pattern at the end of a line.
|-
|| At the prompt type '''grep "^A" grepdemo.txt'''

press '''Enter'''

Point to the output.
|| Let us use anchors.

Now, we will extract entries with roll numbers starting with A.

The roll number is the first field in the file.

Type this command and press '''Enter'''.

Only lines with roll numbers starting with A are shown.

The '''caret''' acts as an anchor for the beginning of the line.

Grep matches lines where the first character is '''A'''.

All other lines, starting with different characters, are ignored.
|-
|| Add annotation.Press '''Ctrl''' and '''L''' keys together to clear the screen.
|| Let me clear the screen
|-
|| Type: '''grep "1$" grepdemo.txt'''Press '''Enter'''.

Type: '''grep "[78]...$" grepdemo.txt'''

press '''Enter'''
|| Let us match a pattern at the end of the file.

To match a pattern at the end of a line, we use the dollar sign.

Here is the output.

To find stipends between 7000''' '''to 8999'''. '''Type this command and press '''Enter'''.

Only lines with stipend numbers ending in the specified digit are shown.

That is, the numbers between 7000 and 8999.

Here, it searches for 7 or 8 first.

Then any 3 characters following it, from the end of the file '''grep demo dot t x t'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* Match more than one pattern
* Check a word that has a different spelling
* Character classes
* Use of '''*''' operators
* Match any one character using dot
* Match a pattern at the beginning and ending of a line.

|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Assignment'''

As an assignment# Search for students whose names contain the letters “ra” in sequence.
# Find entries where the stream is either “Mechanical” or “Electrical.”
# List all students whose roll numbers end with the digit 5.
# Count how many students have a stipend greater than 5000.

|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids educational services private limited SINE IIT Bombay. Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Linux-File-Ownership-and-Permissions/English

2026-01-25T20:08:08Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script:''' '''Linux File Ownership and Permissions''' '''Authors:''' '''Edupyramids''' '''Keywords:''' Linux, File Ownership, File Permissions, chown, chmod,..."

'''Title of the Script:''' '''Linux File Ownership and Permissions'''

'''Authors:''' '''Edupyramids'''

'''Keywords:''' Linux, File Ownership, File Permissions, chown, chmod, chgrp, Inodes, Hard link, Soft link, Symbolic link, Terminal commands, Linux file system, edupyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Linux File Ownership and Permissions.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Manage file ownership and permissions using '''c h own''' and '''c h mod''' commands.
* Change file group ownership using '''chgrp''' command.
* Describe '''i nodes '''and view '''i node''' numbers of the files.
* Create and verify '''hard links '''and '''symbolic links''' in Linux.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using:

'''Ubuntu O S version 24 point 04'''
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://EduPyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org] 
|| To follow this tutorial,

learners should have '''Ubuntu version 24 point 04.'''

For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.
# '''file-attr.zip'''
# '''fa-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''File Attributes'''

'''File-attributes.png'''
|| File attributes are properties linked to a file.Attributes define ownership and permissions.

They include file type, size, and time details.They show who owns the file and who can access it.

File attributes are viewed using the '''l s hyphen l '''command.
|-
|| Switch to terminal

Type''' cd Desktop/file-attr'''

Press '''Enter'''

Highlight the output

'''/Desktop/file-attr$d'''
|| Let us move to the code files folder '''file hyphen attr'''

provided along with the tutorial.

I have downloaded it to my '''Desktop'''.

Now switch to the terminal.

Type '''c d space Desktop slash file hyphen a t t r '''and press Enter.Notice that the prompt path has changed.
|-
|| Type

'''ls -l example1'''

and press''' Enter'''

'''Highlight the output'''

'''point to the first character'''
|| Let us type

'''l s space hyphen l space example1'''

and press '''Enter. '''

Observe the output.

The first character in the output shows the file type.

If it is a '''hyphen''', it denotes a regular file.

If it is '''l,''' it denotes a '''symbolic link'''.

If it is '''d''', it denotes a '''directory.'''

We see a hyphen here since example1 is a regular file.
|-
|| highlight the next 9 characters
|| The next nine characters show '''permissions'''.

First three denote '''owner''' permissions,

Next three denote '''group''' permissions,

Last three denote '''others''' permissions

Here each set contains '''r, '''and''' w,''' means '''read, '''and''' write'''.
|-
|| Highlight '''example1'''

highlight '''spoken'''
|| Here we can see that the owner of the file '''example1''' is '''spoken'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''chown command'''
* The''' chown''' command changes the ownership of a file or directory.
* This is an admin command.
* Only the root user can change the owner of a file or directory.

'''chown [options] ownername filename or directoryname'''
|| * The''' c h own''' command changes the ownership of a file or directory.
* This is an admin command.
* Only the root user can change the ownership of a file or directory.
* Here is the syntax of the '''c h own''' command.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''chown options'''
* -R: change permissions for all files in the current directory and its sub-directories.
* -c: report changes made to files.
* -f: prevent chown from displaying error messages.
|| The '''c h own''' command comes with various options like '''hyphen R, hyphen c, hyphen f''' and others.
|-
||
|| Now we will look at some examples.
|-
|| '''Type'''

'''sudo chown demo example1'''

press '''Enter'''.
|| Let us change the owner of the '''file''' '''example1'''.

Type '''sudo space ch own space demo space example1'''

press Enter.
|-
|| Type the sudo password if prompted.
|| Type the password if prompted again.
|-
|| Type

''' ls -l example1'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Let us see the file attributes of '''example'''1.

Type '''l s space hyphen l space example1''' and press Enter.

Observe that the new owner of the '''file''' is '''demo'''.

This works only if the user named '''demo''' exists.

Otherwise we will get an '''invalid user''' error.

Recall that we have given you an assignment in an earlier tutorial to create a user named''' demo'''.

If the user does not exist, please create the user.
|-
|| Type

'''mkdir pond'''

and press Enter.

Type the command

'''ls -l'''

press Enter

Highlight the pond directory details

highlight examples 1 to 5.
|| Now, we will see how to change the owner''' '''of a '''directory.'''

For that we will create a directory first.

Type '''m k dir space pond '''and press Enter.

To check, type '''l s space hyphen l '''and press Enter.

It displays a directory named''' pond''' and all the existing files examples.

Here we can see the owner of the directory '''pond''' is '''spoken'''
|-
|| Type

'''sudo chown -R demo pond '''
|| Let us change the owner of the directory''' pond''' to '''demo.'''

Type the following command and press '''Enter '''

Enter the sudo password, if required and press Enter again.
|-
|| Press '''Ctrl+L''' keys together.

Type '''ls -l '''and press '''Enter'''.
|| I will clear the screen by pressing '''Ctrl + L''' keys together for our convenience.

Now type,'''l s space hyphen l '''and press '''Enter'''

Here we can see the new owner of the directory '''pond''' is '''demo'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Changing File Permissions'''

ch mod command is used to change the permissions of a file or directory.

The name chmod stands for change mode.

Using chmod we can grant or remove permissions for owner, group and others.

read (r)

write (w)

execute (x)

The command modifies only the permissions, not the file contents or ownership.
|| '''ch mod''' command is used to change the permissions of a''' file '''or''' directory'''.

The name''' c h mod '''stands for change mode.

Using '''chmod '''we can add or remove permissions such as: '''read, write, execute'''.

These permissions can be changed''' '''for '''owner, group '''and '''others.'''

It does not modify the file contents or change ownership.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Syntax of chmod command'''

chmod [ugoa][+-=][rwx] file-or-directory
|| This is the syntax of the '''c h mod''' command.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Permissions using three-digit octal number'''

chmod [0-7][0-7][0-7] file_or_directory

Each digit represents:

1st digit → owner permissions

2nd digit → group permissions

3rd digit → others permissions

Permission values:

r = 4 (read)

w = 2 (write)

x = 1 (execute)
|| Alternatively, we can set permissions using a three digit octal number.
|-
|| Press Clear and press Enter.
|| Now, we will look at some examples of '''ch mod'''.

Let me clear the screen
|-
|| Type'''chmod u+x example2'''

press Enter
|| To add execute permission to the '''owner''' of the file '''example2''' type:'''ch mod space u plus x space example2 '''and''' '''press '''Enter.'''

This will add the execute permission to the owner of the file example2.
|-
|| type

''' ls -l example2

'''press '''Enter'''

highlight the permissions in the output
|| To check that, type

'''l s space hyphen l space example2'''

and press '''Enter''' to see the changes

It has assigned''' read, write''', and''' execute '''permissions to the '''owner.Read '''and''' write''' only permissions to the '''group'''.And '''read-only''' permission to '''others''', for the file example2.
|-
|| Type

'''chmod 751 example2

'''press Enter

type '''ls -l example2'''

and press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type the command

'''ch mod space 751 space example2

'''press '''Enter'''

This command gives the''' owner read, write''', and '''execute '''permissions.

To check type, '''ls space hyphen l space example2''' and press Enter.

'''Read''' and '''execute''' permissions to the '''group'''.

And '''execute-only '''permission to '''others '''for the file '''example2'''.
|-
|| type '''chmod a<nowiki>=</nowiki>r example2'''

and press '''Enter'''
|| To assign '''read-only''' permission to '''example2''' for everyone, type the following command:

'''ch mod space a equal to r space example2''' and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| type '''ls -l example2'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type the command,

'''l s space hyphen l space example2 '''

and press Enter.

Observe that the file '''example2''' has '''read-only '''permission for all users.
|-
|| Type '''chmod g+w example3 '''

and press Enter
|| Let’s add the write permissions to the group for file '''example3'''.

Type the command'''ch mod space g plus w space example3 '''

and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Type'''ls -l example3'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type,'''l s space hyphen l space example3'''

press '''Enter'''.

Note that the write permission has been added to the group.
|-
|| Type '''chmod a-w example3'''

press '''Enter'''
|| To remove the write permissions for all,type the command'''ch mod space a hyphen w space example3'''

press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Type

'''ls -l example3'''

press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Now type, '''l s space hyphen l space example3'''

press Enter.

Observe that write permission for all has been removed
|-
|| '''Slide 12 '''

'''chgrp command'''

'''Ch-grp.png'''
||
* '''ch grp''' command changes the '''group ownership''' of a file or directory.
* Group members can then access it based on the set permissions'''.'''
* Only the owner of a file or a privileged user can change the group.
|-
|| '''Slide 13'''

'''Syntax of chgrp command'''
* The basic syntax of the ch grp command is:'''chgrp [options] group file'''
* To change the group of a directory and all its contents recursively:'''chgrp -R group directory'''
* Here, '''group''' is the new group name, and '''file''' or '''directory''' is the target.
||
* The basic syntax of the''' ch g r p''' command is:'''ch grp options group file.'''
* To change the group of a directory and all its contents recursively type:'''ch grp hyphen R group directory.'''
* Here, '''group''' is the new group name, and '''file''' or '''directory''' is the target.
|-
|| Switch to terminal

Press Clear and press Enter.

type

'''ls -l example4'''

press '''Enter'''

Highlight the permissions in the output
|| Let's look at some examples of '''ch grp''' commands.

Type the command,

'''l s space hyphen l space example4 '''

and press '''Enter.'''

Here we can see the group permission is given for the user '''spoken'''.
|-
|| Type '''sudo chgrp demo example4'''

press Enter
|| To change the group permission, type the command'''sudo space ch grp space demo space example4 '''press Enter.Enter the sudo password, if required.
|-
|| Type

'''ls -l example4'''

press '''Enter'''

Highlight the permissions in the output
|| Now type the command'''l s space hyphen l space example4'''

press '''Enter'''

Observe that the group has changed from '''spoken''' to '''demo'''
|-
|| '''Slide 14'''

'''Inode'''
|| An '''i node''' is a unique number that stores file or directory information.

Files are hard links to i nodes, which the system uses to access data.
|-
|| Switch to the terminal

type the command

'''ls -i example5'''

press Enter

Highlight the number in the output
|| We can use''' l s space hyphen i''' command to see the '''i node '''number of a file.

type the command,''' l s space hyphen i space example5'''

press '''Enter.'''

The number written before the file is the i node number of the file.

The '''i node''' number may vary for the users.
|-
|| '''Slide 15'''

'''Hard Links'''
|| A hard link is another name for an existing file.

Both files point to the same '''i node.'''

Since they share the same i node, they share the same data on disk.

The file is not copied, only a new filename is created.
|-
|| '''Slide 16'''

'''Inode and Hard Links'''
|| An i node can have multiple directory entries through hard links.

Hard links let multiple filenames point to the same i node.

To create links in Linux, we use the '''ln''' command.
|-
|| '''Slide 17'''

'''Syntax of ln'''

'''ln source link'''
|| The syntax of '''ln''' command to create a hard link is:

'''ln space source space link'''

The source is an existing file, and the link is the new filename.

Both files point to the same i node and share the same data.

Any change made to one file will reflect in the other file.
|-
|| Type: clear

and press enter

'''ln example2 exampleln'''

press Enter

Point to the command.
|| Now we will look at some examples of hard links

Let me clear the screen again.

Type the command,

'''l n space example2 space example l n'''

press Enter.

This command creates a hard link named '''exampleln''' to the file '''example2.'''
|-
|| Type '''ls -i example2 exampleln'''

press Enter

Highlight to the output
||

To display the i node number of both the files, type the command'''l s space hyphen i space example2 space exampleln'''

and press '''Enter.'''

The output shows that both files have the same i node number.

File '''exampleln''' is the hard link for file example2
|-
|| '''Slide 18'''

'''Soft Link'''
|| A soft link or a symbolic link is a special type of file.

It holds a reference to another file or directory.

This reference is an absolute or relative path.
|-
|| '''ln -s target-filename symbolic-filename'''
|| The syntax of''' l n command''' to create soft links is'''l n space hyphen s space target hyphen filename space symbolic hyphen filename.'''
|-
||
|| Now we will look at some examples of soft links.
|-
||

type '''ln -s example2 examplesoft''' press Enter
|| To create a soft link, type the command

'''l n space hyphen s space example2 space examplesoft '''and press Enter.
|-
|| type the command

''' ls -li example2 examplesoft '''press Enter
|| Now, let us display the i node number and list both the files.

Type the command,

'''l s space hyphen l i space example2 space examplesoft'''

press '''Enter.'''

Observe that the '''i node''' number of both the files is different.

'''examplesoft''' is a''' soft link''' of''' example2'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 19'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* Manage file ownership and permissions using '''chown''' and '''chmod''' commands.
* Change file group ownership using '''chgrp''' command.
* Describe '''inodes '''and view '''inode''' numbers of the files.
* Create and verify '''hard links '''and '''symbolic links''' in Linux.
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 20'''

'''Assignment'''
# Create a file named '''sample.txt'''.
# Display its permissions using the ls -l command.
# Change the permissions so that only the owner can read and write the file.
# Display the inode number of '''sample.txt'''.
|| As an Assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 21'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This '''Spoken Tutorial''' is brought to you by '''EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.'''Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C3/Introduction-to-grep-command/English

2026-01-25T09:13:40Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: Introduction to grep command. '''Author:''' EduPyramids.''' '''Keywords:''' '''grep, pattern matching, case-insensitive, inverse match, multiword sea..."

'''Title of the Script: Introduction to grep command.

'''Author:''' EduPyramids.'''

'''Keywords:''' '''grep, pattern matching, case-insensitive, inverse match, multiword search, line numbers, count matches, edupyramids, video tutorial.'''

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Introduction to grep command'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2 Learning Objectives  '''

|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:* View the content of a file
* List entries of a particular stream
* Ignore cases while searching
* Handle lines that do not match a pattern
* Display line numbers with the entries
* Store the result in another file
* Count the number of matches

|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System  Requirements'''

|| To record this tutorial, I am using 

'''Ubuntu OS '''version 24 point zero 4
|-
|| '''Slide 4Pre-requisites'''

'''https://EduPyramids.org'''

|| To follow this tutorial,

Learners should have '''Ubuntu version 24 point zero 4'''.

And should be familiar with basic Linux terminal commands.

For the prerequisite of Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files'''

The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.# '''grepdemo.txt'''
# '''igc-commands.txt'''

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
| |
|| First let us learn about regular expressions.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Regular Expressions'''
|| * Regular expressions are patterns used to match text.
* They help to search and filter information in files.
* They can match words, numbers, or character sequences.
* In Linux, commands like '''grep''' use regular expressions.

|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''grep command '''
|| * '''grep''' is a '''Linux''' command used to search text.
* It finds lines that match a given pattern.
* It works on files or standard input.
* It supports regular expressions for searching.

|-
|| Download code file.Cut and paste to Home directory.open '''grepdemo.txt '''code file.
|| We will now demonstrate the '''grep''' command using the '''grepdemo.txt file'''.

Download this file and move it to your home directory.
|-
|| show the entries and point to the separation bar (|)
|| This file contains 13 entries.Each entry has a roll number, name, stream, marks, result, and stipend.

The fields are separated by a vertical bar, which acts as a '''delimiter'''.
|-
|| '''Note: Please type the commands on the terminal don't paste as the double quotes are wrong.'''
|| Let us see how grep works.

Let’s find students from the computer’s stream.
|-
|| Type

'''grep "computers" grepdemo.txt '''press enterShow side by side '''grepdemo.txt '''file entries.
|| At the terminal type, '''grep space double quote computers double quote space grepdemo dot t x t '''and press '''Enter'''. The output shows entries from the computer’s stream.

Let us compare it with the original file.
|-
|| Highlight Zubin entry in the file
|| Notice that the entry for Zubin is missing. This happens because '''grep''' is case sensitive.
|-
|| Point to the capital C
|| Why is this entry missing?

'''grep''' searched for computers in lowercase.

Zubin’s stream is written as Computers with a capital '''C'''.
|-
|| Type '''grep -i "computers" grepdemo.txt '''Highlight '''-i'''press '''Enter'''
|| Pattern matching is case sensitive by default.To make it case insensitive, we need to use the '''hyphen i '''option with '''grep'''.

Type this command and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Point to the output.
|| Now, all four matching entries are displayed.

Observe that,''' grep''' lists only the lines that match a given pattern.

We can also do the reverse.
|-
|| Type '''grep -iv "pass" grepdemo.txt '''Highlight '''-v'''press '''Enter'''

Point to the output.
|| Type this command. The '''hyphen v '''option lists the lines that do not match a pattern. Press '''Enter '''to see the output.

Output shows students who failed or have incomplete results.
|-
|| Show side by side home folder.Type '''grep -iv "pass" grepdemo.txt > notpass.txt''' press '''Enter'''.
|| Let us store the output in a file named '''not pass dot t x t'''.

Type this command and press''' Enter'''.The file is created successfully.
|-
|| Type '''cat notpass.txt '''press '''Enter'''.
|| To view the students who have not passed, type '''cat space not pass dot t x t '''and press '''Enter'''.Observe the output.
|-
|| Type '''grep -i "fail" grepdemo.txt '''

Highlight''' '''output
|| Type this command to list the failed students and press '''Enter'''.The output shows all students who have failed.
|-
|| type

'''grep -in "fail" grepdemo.txt '''

press enter
|| Let us use the '''hyphen n '''option to show line numbers with matching entries.

Type this command and press '''Enter'''.

Observe the output.
|-
|| Type '''clear '''press''' Enter'''.
|| Let us clear the terminal screen.
|-
| |
|| So far, we used single-word patterns. For multi-word patterns, we have to put the entire pattern in quotes.
|-
|| type

'''grep -i "ankit saraf" grepdemo.txt '''press enter
|| Type this command and press '''Enter'''.

We can see that '''Ankit Saraf''''s record is displayed.
|-
|| At the prompt type

'''grep -i "fail" grepdemo.txt notpass.txt'''

press''' Enter'''.
|| We can also find patterns in multiple files.Type this command and press''' Enter'''.

Observe the output.
|-
|| Point to the output.
|| While searching for multiple files, '''grep''' shows the filename for each match.

In this example, '''grep demo dot t x t '''and '''not pass dot t x t '''are searched.
|-
|| Show only the inside files contents of '''notpass.txt '''and '''grepdemo.txt'''
|| These are the records from '''not pass dot t x t''' file and these are the records from '''grep demo dot t x t''' file.
|-
|| Type

'''grep -c “Fail” grepdemo.txt''' press '''Enter'''.
|| To display only the number of matches, use the '''hyphen c''' option.

Type this command and press the '''Enter '''key. Output shows the number of matches.

|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* View the content of a file
* List entries of a particular stream
* Ignore cases while searching
* Handle lines that do not match a pattern
* Display line numbers with the entries
* Store the result in another file
* Count the number of matches

|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Assignment'''

As an assignment# Use grep to find all students in the “Maths” stream in grepdemo.txt.
# List lines that do '''not''' contain civil and save to '''nonCivil.txt'''.
# Show line numbers of entries containing fail.
# Search for a multi-word pattern, for example Mani Chowdhari, in '''grepdemo.txt'''.

|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 10 Thank you'''

|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited, SINE, IIT Bombay. Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C3/Introduction-to-the-Stream-Editor-sed/English

2026-01-25T06:52:19Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of script''': '''Introduction to the Stream Editor sed.''' '''Author: EduPyramids.''' '''Keywords: stream editor, sed, display, substitute, insert, delete, context..."

'''Title of script''': '''Introduction to the Stream Editor sed.'''

'''Author: EduPyramids.'''

'''Keywords: stream editor, sed, display, substitute, insert, delete, context addressing, Line addressing, edupyramids, video tutorial.'''

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Introduction to the Stream Editor sed'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Use '''sed''' as a stream editor to process text.
* Print specific lines from a file.
* Apply line-based addressing techniques.
* Use context-based addressing with pattern matching.
* Redirect matched output to files.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using
* '''Ubuntu OS '''version 24 point 04 and
* '''Bash''' version 5 point 1 point 16.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://EduPyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should have '''Ubuntu '''version''' 24 point 04.'''
* '''Bash''' version 5 point 1 point 16 and
* Should know the basics of '''Linux''' terminal.
* For the prerequisite '''Linux''' tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files'''

The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.
# '''seddemo.txt.'''
# '''sed-commands.txt'''

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
||
* The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.
* These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Introduction to sed'''
||
* '''sed''' is one of the most versatile tools available in Linux.
* It is a '''stream''' '''editor''' used to process text line by line.
* '''sed '''can function both as a display tool and an editing tool.
* It supports editing operations such as insertion, substitution and deletion.
* By default, '''sed '''sends its output to the standard output.
* The original file remains unchanged unless '''sed''' is explicitly instructed to modify it.
|-
|| Open the file '''seddemo.txt'''

Highlight the lines, marks and student details.
|| Let us start with a few examples.

We will see how to print lines using the '''sed''' command.

I have a file called '''sed demo dot t x t''' in the home directory.

This file is provided in the code files folder. Please download it and move it to your Home directory.

Let us view its contents.

This file contains entries such as roll no, name, stream, marks, result and the stipend amount.
|-
|| Press '''Ctrl + Alt + T keys.'''
|| Let us open the terminal.
|-
|| Type:'''sed '2p' seddemo.txt'''
|| Let’s print the second line of the file.

Type,

'''sed space single quote 2 p single quote space sed demo dot t x t'''.
|-
|| '''Highlight 2'''

'''Highlight p'''

Press '''Enter'''

highlight the output.

Hover your mouse on the second line of the output
|| Here, '''2''' specifies the location, which is the second line.The letter '''p''' specifies the action, which is printing.

Press '''Enter'''.

Observe the output.

It shows the entire file but the second line appears twice.

This is the default behavior of '''sed'''.

'''sed''' prints every line by default

The '''p''' option prints the specified line again.
|-
|| At the prompt type:

'''sed -n '2p' seddemo.txt '''Press''' Enter'''
|| To print only the second line, type this command and press''' Enter.'''
|-
|| '''Highlight -n'''

'''Highlight 2'''

'''Highlight p'''

'''Highlight sed demo.txt'''
|| Observe that only the second line is printed.
* The '''hyphen n '''option suppresses the default output of sed.
* '''2''' specifies the line number to display or edit.
* '''p''' specifies the action to perform.
* It tells '''sed''' to print the selected line.
* '''sed demo dot t x t''' specifies the input file name.

This is the general syntax of the '''sed''' command.
|-
|| At the prompt type:'''sed -n '$p' seddemo.txt''' Press''' Enter.'''

'''Highlight -n'''

'''Highlight $ sign'''
|| Now let us print the last line.Type this command and''' '''press '''Enter'''. We see that the last line is displayed.

The '''hyphen n''' suppresses automatic printing of all lines.

Dollar refers to the last line of the file.
|-
|| At the prompt

'''sed -n '3,6p' seddemo.txt '''press''' Enter'''

'''Highlight the output'''
|| Let us just print the entries from the third line to the sixth line of the file.

Type this command and''' '''press '''Enter'''.

The output displays the lines from the third line to the sixth line.
|-
|| Type'''sed -n '3,6!p' seddemo.txt'''

Press''' Enter'''

'''Show the file on one side and the output comparison'''
|| If we want to print all lines except the third to the sixth lines.

Type this command.Any action can be reversed by placing an exclamation mark before the command.

This allows us to select the complementary set of lines.

Press '''Enter'''.

The output displays all lines except lines 3 to 6.
|-
||
|| So far, we have specified the lines in a file on which an action applies.

This method is known as '''line addressing.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Line addressing'''
|| Line addressing identifies lines using their position in the file.

It is one way to select specific lines for an action.

Another method is called '''context addressing'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Context''' '''addressing'''
||
* '''Context''' '''addressing''' selects lines based on their content.
* Lines are matched using a word, string, or pattern.
* Only the lines that match the pattern are processed.
* It is useful when line numbers are unknown or variable.
* Regular expressions can be used for flexible and powerful matching.
* Commonly used for searching and filtering text in files.
|-
||
|| Let us see an example.
|-
|| Highlight the lines with word computers in the text editor- show the text file '''seddemo.txt'''.

At the prompt'''sed -n '/[cC]omputers/p' seddemo.txt'''

Highlight '''-n'''

highlight '''/[cC]omputers/'''

'''highlight p'''

Press Enter.

highlight '''/[cC]omputers/'''
|| Suppose we want to print the lines containing the word '''computers'''.

Go to the Terminal.

Type the following command.

'''hyphen n '''suppresses default output.

This is the '''Context address'''.

It matches lines containing the word computers with small c and capital C.

'''p,''' prints the matched lines.

Press '''Enter'''.

Observe the output.

The lines containing the word '''computers''' are displayed.

We enclose parts of the pattern within square brackets.

This allows us to match any one character present inside the brackets.

When using a pattern in '''sed''', it must be written '''between forward slashes.'''
|-
|| Type the command:

'''sed -n '/[cC]omputers/w computer-student' seddemo.txt'''

press '''Enter.'''

'''Open file and show the computer-student '''
|| Let us now see how to write the matched output to a file using the '''w''' option.

Type the following command.

and Press '''Enter'''.

Output is redirected to a file instead of getting displayed on the terminal.

This is useful for extracting specific lines into a separate file.

All matching lines are saved in the file '''computer hyphen student. '''
|-
|| Type

'''cat computer-student '''andPress '''Enter'''
|| Let us view the content of the '''computer hyphen student '''file.

type '''cat''' '''space''' '''computer hyphen student''' and press''' Enter.'''

We see that lines that match the given pattern are in the file.
|-
|| Type the following command.'''sed -n -e '/electronics/w electro' -e '/civil/w civil' seddemo.txt'''Press '''Enter'''

'''Highlight -e'''

'''Highlight /electronics/w electro'''

'''Highlight /civil/w civil'''

Show the two files created
|| Let us see how we can use '''multiple sed expressions''' in a single command. This allows us to write different matched lines to separate files.

Type this command and press '''Enter.'''

The '''hyphen e''' option allows combining multiple sed commands in a single line.

'''slash electronics slash w''' '''electro '''writes lines matching electronics to '''electro '''file.

'''slash civil slash w civil''' writes lines matching civil to '''civil '''file.

After running the command, two text files, '''electro''' and '''civil''', are created with the matched lines.
|-
|| '''cat electro '''Press Enter

Highlight the contents

'''cat civil'''

Press Enter

Highlight the contents
|| To see what they contain, type '''cat space''' '''electro '''and press''' Enter.'''

This displays the entries with the word '''electronics'''.

Let us see the contents of the file '''civil '''

Type '''cat space''' '''civil '''and press''' Enter.'''

This displays the entries having the word '''civil'''.
|-
||
|| We will see more sed commands in the upcoming tutorial.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* Use '''sed''' as a stream editor to process text
* Print specific lines from a file
* Apply line-based addressing techniques
* Use context-based addressing with pattern matching
* Redirect matched output to files
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Assignment '''

As an assignment,

Using the text file '''seddemo.txt,'''
# Print only the first five lines of the file.
# Print all lines that do not contain the word "failed".
# Write all lines containing the word student into a file named '''student-list.txt.'''
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Thank you'''

|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by '''EduPyramids''' Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.

Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Basics-of-System-Administration-in-Linux/English

2026-01-23T20:58:52Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: Basics of System Administration in Linux''' '''Author: EduPyramids''' '''Keywords: '''su, adduser, usermod, userdel, UID, GID, du, df, Linux, System..."

'''Title of the Script: Basics of System Administration in Linux'''

'''Author: EduPyramids'''

'''Keywords: '''su, adduser, usermod, userdel, UID, GID, du, df, Linux, System Admin, EduPyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Basics of System Administration in Linux.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Create, modify, switch, and delete Linux user accounts.
* View details of users, groups, and system IDs.
* Monitor disk usage, file and directory sizes, and file system space.
* Use basic Linux commands for system and storage management.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using,

'''Ubuntu '''version 24 point zero 4.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]

|| To follow this tutorial,

Learners should have '''Ubuntu '''version 24 point zero 4.

Admin access or the root permission to execute the commands shown in the tutorial.

For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

'''sa-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us create a new user account.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''adduser '''
|| The '''adduser''' command creates a new user with login credentials.

We can add user accounts with the help of the '''sudo '''command.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''sudo'''
|| The '''sudo '''command lets authorized users run commands as administrators.

The '''sudo '''command has several options.

We will learn these as we progress in this tutorial.
|-
|| '''Type: sudo adduser '''

and press '''Enter'''.

'''Type administrator password''' and press '''Enter'''. Highlight message '''adduser: Only one or two names allowed'''
|| Let us now learn how to create a new user.In the terminal type '''sudo space add user'''and press '''Enter'''.

Type the '''administrator password''' and press '''Enter'''.

The password typed in the terminal is not visible, so type it carefully.

After entering the password, a message saying'''Only one or two names allowed.'''
|-
|| Type '''sudo adduser edupyramids'''

Press '''Enter'''.Show side by side in files '''edupyramids.'''
|| So, let us create a new user account named '''edupyramids'''. Type: '''sudo space adduser space edupyramids '''and press '''Enter'''.

We have now created a new user called '''edupyramids'''.

A separate home directory is created automatically during the user creation.
|-
|| Type password: '''edup12345'''Press '''Enter'''again type password: '''edup12345 '''press '''Enter'''

Highlight additional details asking in the terminal.
|| Please note that you will be prompted to set a '''new password''' for the user '''edupyramids'''.

Type a password of your choice.I am typing '''edu p 1 2 3 4''' '''5''' as the password and press '''Enter'''.

We will be asked to type the new password again.The password is requested twice for security and confirmation.

The password for the new user is now set.
|-
|| Full Name: '''EduPyramids'''press '''Enter'''

Press '''y'''Press '''Enter'''
|| Next, we are prompted to enter additional details.Let us enter only the '''Full Name''' as '''EduPyramids'''.

Let’s leave the remaining fields blank by pressing the '''Enter''' key.

Finally, to confirm the information type '''y''' and press Enter. This confirms that all the entered details are correct.
|-
|| Type''' ls /home'''Press '''Enter'''Highlight '''edupyramids'''
|| Let us now check if the user account has been created.

For that type: '''l s space slash home'''and press '''Enter'''.

Here, we can see our newly created user named '''edupyramids'''.The next command we will look at is '''su'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''su command'''
|| '''su''' stands for '''switch user'''.It is used to switch from the current user to another user account.
|-
|| '''Switch to the terminal'''

'''Type'''

'''su - edupyramids'''

'''press enter'''

'''Highlight edupyramids@spoken-Inspiron-One- :/$'''

'''enter password: edup12345'''

Type '''logout'''

and press enter
|| Now type, '''su space hyphen space edupyramids''' and press '''Enter'''.

At the prompt enter the password for the user '''edupyramids'''. Please recall that the password we had set was '''edu p 1 2 3 4 5'''.

Observe that the Terminal shows the new user prompt.

To log out from this user, type '''logout''' and press '''Enter'''.

The terminal now logs out from the current user, '''edupyramids'''.

It returns to the previous user account, '''spoken'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''usermod command '''
|| Let us now learn about the '''user mod''' command.

The '''user mod''' command lets a superuser modify existing user accounts.

It can lock or disable accounts, manage passwords, and set account expiry dates.
|-
|| '''Type sudo usermod -e 2026-12-27 edupyramids'''

'''Highlight -e'''
|| We will now set an expiry date for the user account '''edupyramids'''.

Type: '''sudo space usermod space hyphen e space 2026 hyphen 12 hyphen 27 space edupyramids '''and press '''Enter'''.If prompted, type the admin password.

The user account expiry date is now set using the '''hyphen e''' option.

This means the user account '''edupyramids''' will be disabled after 27 December 2026.
|-
|| '''Type id'''

and press Enter.
|| At the terminal, type '''id''' and press Enter.

The output shows, '''User I D, Group I D''',and the groups to which the current user belongs.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''UID '''
|| '''U I D '''stands for '''User I D. '''It is a unique number assigned by the system to each user account.

It identifies the user for permissions and ownership.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''GID'''
|| '''G I D '''stands for '''Group I D.'''

It is a unique number assigned to a group.

It identifies a group of users for file and directory permissions.
|-
|| Type''' id -u '''press''' Enter'''
|| To display only the '''User I D''', type:'''id space hyphen u press Enter'''

The output shows only the user ID of the current user.
|-
|| Type '''id -n -u''' press '''Enter'''
|| To see the '''username''' instead of the''' numeric ID''', type '''id space hyphen n space hyphen u'''

and press Enter.

The output shows the '''username''' corresponding to the user ID.
|-
|| Type''' id -g '''press''' EnterHighlight output'''Type''' id -G '''press''' EnterHighlight output'''
|| Let us now learn the commands related to '''Group ID'''s.

At the terminal, type '''id space hyphen g''' and press Enter.

This displays the '''primary group ID''' of the current user.

To see all group IDs of the current user,

type: '''id hyphen capital G '''and press '''Enter'''

You can now see a list of all '''group IDs''' associated with the current user.
|-
||
|| Now let us learn to delete a user using the '''userdel''' command.The '''userdel''' command permanently deletes a user account.
|-
|| Type''' sudo userdel -r edupyramids '''press''' Enter'''Type''' ls /home '''press''' Enter'''
|| Type '''sudo space userdel space hyphen r space edupyramids '''and press '''Enter'''.

The '''hyphen r '''option removes the user along with its user’s home directory.

Press '''Enter''' to see what happens.

Now, the user '''edupyramids''' has been deleted.

To verify this, type:

'''ls space slash home '''

and press '''Enter'''.

We can see that the user account '''edupyramids''' has been deleted.

The''' hyphen r''' option removes the home directory as well.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

'''df and du '''
|| Some useful system administration commands are '''d f''' and '''d u'''.

The '''d f''' command displays the available and used disk space.

The''' d u''' command shows how much disk space a file or directory occupies.
|-
||
|| Let us clear the screen
|-
|| '''Type df -h '''press''' Enter'''
||

On the terminal type:

'''d f space hyphen h'''

and press '''Enter'''.

We see:
* The size of each file system.
* The space used and available.
* The mount points.

The '''hyphen h '''option shows the sizes in human-readable format, for easy understanding.
|-
|| Type: '''touch test1 test2 test3''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Let us now try some options with the '''d u''' command.

Let me create test files named as test1 test2 test3 in my home directory.
|-
|| Type''' du -s * '''press''' Enter'''

Highlight the summary in the output

'''Type cd /home/spoken '''and press '''Enter'''.

type: '''du -s * '''and press '''Enter'''.

Highlight the summary of the sizes shown in the output

type '''du -ch *'''press '''Enter'''

Highlight the output
|| Now type:

'''d u space hyphen s space asterisk '''and press '''Enter'''.Option '''hyphen s''' gives a summary per file.

This command gives a summary of the sizes of all files in the folder.

Next, type '''du hyphen c h asterisk '''press''' Enter '''to''' '''observe the output.

'''hyphen c''' provides a total size.

'''h''' makes sizes human-readable.
|-
|| '''Slide 13'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial we have learnt to:
* Create, modify, switch, and delete Linux user accounts.
* View details of users, groups, and system IDs.
* Monitor disk usage, file and directory sizes, and file system space.
* Use basic Linux commands for system and storage management.
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us Summarize.
|-
|| '''Slide 14'''

'''Assignment'''

As an assignment
# Create a new user''' demo '''and verify the home directory.
# Switch users using '''su''' and '''logout'''.
# Set an expiry date for this user using usermod -'''e'''.
# Check the '''UID''' and '''GID''' of users
# Use '''df -h''' and '''du -ch <nowiki>*</nowiki> '''to check disk usage for practice files.
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 15'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited, SINE, IIT Bombay.Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/The-Linux-Environment/English

2026-01-23T19:51:44Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: The Linux Environment.''' '''Author:''' EduPyramids '''Keywords:''' Environment variables, local variables, PATH,HOME, profile, history, alias, edupy..."

'''Title of the Script: The Linux Environment.'''

'''Author:''' EduPyramids

'''Keywords:''' Environment variables, local variables, PATH,HOME, profile, history, alias, edupyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''The Linux Environment.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:
* Linux environment and shell variables
* View and modify environment variables
* Navigate to directories and use '''tilde '''shortcut
* Re-run the commands using history and aliases
* Customize prompts and make rm interactive
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using,
* '''Ubuntu OS version 24 point 04'''
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://EduPyramids.org'''
|| To follow this tutorial,

Learners should have '''Ubuntu version 24 point 04'''

For the prerequisite of Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

'''le-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Slide 6 '''

'''Linux Environment'''

'''env-image.png'''
|| * The Linux environment controls how the operating system behaves.
* It determines how commands are processed and actions are interpreted.
* The environment can be customized to suit user preferences.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Shell Variables'''

'''image'''
|| The behaviour of the shell is controlled by '''shell variables'''

Shell variables influence how commands execute and display results

There are two main types of''' shell variables:'''
* Environment Variables
* Local Variables
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Environment Variables'''
|| * Environment variables are available throughout the user’s working environment.
* Inherited by '''subshells''' (for example, when running shell scripts).
* Commonly used to store paths, usernames, language settings, etc.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Local Variables'''
|| * Local variables have a limited scope
* They are available only in the current shell session
* They are not available to subshells created by the shell.
|-
||
|| This tutorial will mainly focus on environment variables.

We will begin by exploring how to display the values of these variables.
|-
|| Press Ctrl, alt and T keys together.

Type''' set | more'''

press enter
|| Let us open the terminal.

To see all the variables available in the current shell, we use the set command.

Type: '''set space vertical bar space more'''

and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Point to the output.
|| We can see all the current shell variables ,
|-
|| Press Enter and locate the HOME environment.
|| For example, Take a look at the '''HOME''' environment variable and notice the value assigned to it.
|-
|| Press E'''nter'''

Press''' q '''
|| Press '''Enter''' to move through the list.

Press '''q''' to come out.
|-
|| Highlight '''set | more'''
|| Here, the output of the '''set '''command is piped to '''more'''.This allows the list of variables to be displayed in a systematic, multi-page format.
|-
||
|| To see only the environment variables, we will run the '''e n v''' command.
|-
|| '''Type '''

'''env | more''' and''' '''press '''Enter'''
|| Type''' e n v space vertical bar space more '''and press''' Enter'''
|-
|| Highlight '''SHELL=/bin/bash'''
||

Notice the '''SHELL''' variable whose value is '''slash bin slash bash. '''
|-
|| Press '''q''' to exit the list
|| Again, you may press '''q''' to come out of the list.
|-
|| Type '''clear''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Let’s clear the screen.
|-
||
|| Now let us discuss some important '''environment''' '''variables''' in '''linux'''.
|-
||
|| We will use the '''bash''' '''shell''' for all our demonstrations.
|-
||
|| Different shells are customized in slightly different ways.
|-
||

Add $ before name
|| To see a variable’s value, add a '''dollar''' sign before its name.
|-
||
|| The first environment variable that we will see is the '''SHELL''' variable.

It stores the name of the current shell.
|-
|| Type

'''echo $SHELL '''

Press Enter
|| Type '''echo space dollar SHELL''' in capital and press '''Enter'''.

The value of the '''SHELL''' variable is as shown .
|-
|| Highlight '''/bin/bash'''
|| Here '''slash bin slash bash''' is the shell where we are currently operating.
|-
||
|| The next variable is '''HOME'''.
|-
||
|| When we log in to Linux, we are placed in a directory named after our username.

This directory is called the '''home directory''', and its path is stored in the '''HOME''' variable.
|-
|| Type at the command prompt

'''echo $HOME '''and''' '''press '''Enter'''
|| To see the value, type '''echo space dollar HOME''' in capital and press E'''nter'''

We see the output as '''slash home slash spoken'''
|-
|| '''The Path Variable'''
|| The next environment variable is the '''PATH'''.
|-
||
|| The '''PATH''' variable contains the absolute paths of the directories.

The '''shell''' searches them to find executable commands.
|-
|| Type: '''echo $PATH '''

press '''Enter'''

Highlight the directories.

'''/usr/local/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin:/sbin:/bin:/usr/games:/usr/local/games:/snap/bin:/snap/bin ('''This path might differ so while recording please copy the path and paste it here in the script.)
|| Let us now see the value of the '''PATH''' variable.

type '''echo space dollar PATH''' in capital letters and press '''Enter'''.

The output shows the directories present on the system.

This list may vary slightly from one system to another.
|-
||
|| It is a list of directories separated by a colon (:).The '''shell''' searches these directories in order to find an executable command.
|-
||
|| We can configure the shell to look for commands in our own directory.
|-
|| '''Type PATH=$PATH:/home/spoken''' Highlight '''spoken from above command'''

and press '''Enter'''.
|| Type this command and press '''Enter'''.users can type their home directory's name.

Now, any executable scripts you place in '''slash''' '''home slash spoken '''can be run '''without typing the full path'''.
|-
|| '''Type echo $PATH''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Now, let’s '''echo''' the value of '''PATH''', to see its current contents.

Type '''echo space dollar PATH''' in capital and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Highlight to the added directory
|| Our added directory will also be a part of the '''PATH''' variable.
|-
|| select and hover over the change in value of path variable
|| The directory is now available here.

Note that this change is temporary and applies only to this terminal session.
|-
|| '''Type clear'''
|| let us clear the terminal.
|-
||
|| Another interesting variable is the '''LOG NAME'''.

It stores the username of the currently active user.
|-
|| '''Type echo $LOGNAME'''

press '''Enter'''

Highlight '''spoken'''
|| In order to see the value type '''echo space dollar LOG NAME'''

and press E'''nter'''. Observe that, in the output''' spoken '''is displayed.
|-
|| '''Type PS1="@" '''

and press '''Enter'''.

Highlight the''' @''' sign.
|| Now, let us change the shell prompt.Type the following command and press '''Enter'''.

After pressing Enter, the terminal prompt will change to the at the rate symbol.

This is the primary prompt string represented by the environment variable '''P S 1. '''
|-
|| Press Enter few times to highlight the change displaying @
|| Press '''Enter''' a few times to see the '''at the rate''' prompt.
|-
|| Type bash

and press Enter

Highlight the prompt
|| To get back to the original prompt type

'''bash''' and press''' Enter'''.
|-
|| '''Type echo $PS2 '''and press''' Enter.'''

'''Highlight greater than prompt'''
|| To see the secondary command prompt, type '''echo space dollar P S 2 '''in capital.

and press '''Enter'''.

Greater than sign is the secondary prompt string represented by the environment variable '''P S 2.'''

The greater than sign is seen only once and the original prompt appears.
|-
||
|| Now let’s try something more interesting.

Let’s display our '''username''' as the''' shell prompt'''.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''PS1=$LOGNAME'''

press '''Enter'''

Highlight the new prompt
|| Type '''P S 1''' in capital '''equals dollar LOGNAME''' and press Enter.

We can see the username '''spoken''' is visible as my prompt.
|-
|| Type: '''PS1="$"'''

and press '''Enter'''
|| To just show a dollar prompt type,

'''P S 1 equals to double quotes dollar double quotes '''and press '''Enter'''.
|-
||
|| We have assigned values of several environment variables.
|-
|| Click the + icon on the top left corner.

These changes apply '''only to the current session'''.
|| Open a new tab.

Observe that these changes apply only to the current session.

That is why a new tab shows the original prompt.

Let us close the new terminal tab.
|-
|| Type '''bash'''

and press '''Enter'''

Highlight the prompt
|| To get back to the original prompt type

'''bash''' and press''' Enter'''.
|-
|| '''Type: echo $PATH'''

Press Enter.
|| For example, we just added our directory to the PATH variable.
|-
|| Press + to open new terminal tab.

type '''echo $PATH '''

and press Enter

Highlight the output
|| Open a new terminal tab and type '''echo DOLLAR PATH''' and press Enter.

The same path variable will not be seen.

let us go back to the previous terminal.
|-
|| Press up direction key
|| Press the '''Up arrow key''' to see the last command we used.
|-
||
|| Keep pressing it to move through earlier commands.
|-
|| Press down direction key
|| Press the '''Down arrow key''' to move forward again.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''history'''

and press '''Enter'''.
|| However, scrolling through many commands may be clumsy and tedious.

A better way is to use the '''history '''command.

Type '''history''' and press '''Enter''' to see a list of previously executed commands.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''history 10'''

and press '''Enter'''
|| If you want to see only the last ten commands instead of the full list,

Type '''history space 10''' and press '''Enter'''
|-
|| Point to the assigned numbers.
|| Notice, in this list, there is a number assigned to each of the previously executed commands.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''!1348 '''press '''Enter'''.

Highlight the''' output numbers '''
|| To repeat a command, type an exclamation mark followed by its number.

For example '''1348''' in my case would execute '''echo space dollar path.'''

Please note the number may not be the same for you.

Type the number that is seen on your terminal and press Enter to execute the command.
|-
|| Type '''!! '''Press '''Enter'''.
|| To execute the last command, type''' exclamation mark twice''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| '''Type clear and press Enter.'''
|| let me clear the terminal
|-
|| '''Tilde character Substitution''' type '''cd ~''' press '''Enter.'''
|| Next, we will learn about '''tilde''' '''substitution'''.The tilde''' '''character is a shortcut for the home directory.

type '''c d space''' '''tilde''' press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Type '''mkdir testtree '''and press '''Enter'''

Type''' cd ~/testtree''', Press '''Enter'''.

Type:''' pwd, '''Press '''Enter'''.
|| Let us create a directory named '''testtree''' in the home directory.

Type: '''m k d i r space test tree '''and press '''Enter'''.

Now type '''cd space tilde slash test tree''', press '''Enter'''.

Type '''p w d''' and Press '''Enter''' to the current directory.
|-
|| (Before the video create such a long directory hierarchy)
|| The '''alias''' command in Linux is used to create '''shortcuts''' for longer commands.
|-
|| Type

'''mkdir songs'''

and press '''Enter'''

'''cd''' '''songs'''

and press Enter

'''mkdir music'''

and press '''Enter'''

'''cd music'''

and press Enter

Type

'''pwd'''

highlight the long path:

'''/home/spoken/testtree/songs/music'''
|| Let us create a few directories to show a long path in the '''test''' '''tree '''directory.

Type''' m k d i r space songs''' and press '''Enter''' to make the directory.

Type '''c d space songs''' and press '''Enter''' to move the '''songs''' directory.

Now type '''m k d i r space music''' to create the '''music '''directory.

Type''' c d space music''' and press '''Enter''' to move the '''music '''directory.

Let us clear the screen.

Now type '''p w d '''to see the directory path.

This shows that we are now in the music directory.
|-
|| Type''' alias music='cd /home/spoken/testtree/songs/music' '''press '''Enter'''

type '''cd '''and press '''Enter'''
|| Now type the '''alias''' command and press '''Enter'''.

Let us now go to the home directory.

Type '''c d''' and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Type:''' music''' press '''Enter'''.

Run '''pwd''' to illustrate the effect of the previous command

|| To switch to the music directory, type '''music''' and press '''Enter'''.

You can see that we are now in the '''music''' directory.
|-
|| '''Type at the command prompt'''

'''cd -'''
|| Now, type '''c d space hyphen '''to go back to the previous working directory.
|-
|| Type''' unalias music'''

press '''enter'''

Type '''cd '''and press '''Enter'''
|| To remove this alias, type '''unalias space music'''

and press '''Enter'''.Type '''c d '''and press '''Enter''' to go to the home directory.
|-
|| Type''' music'''

press '''Enter'''

Highlight the error

|| Now again type '''music''' and press '''Enter.'''

We get an error stating that the command was not found.
|-
|| Type: '''cd''' '''/home/spoken/testtree/songs/music'''

press Enter
|| Let's go back to the '''music''' directory.
|-
|| run '''touch test1 test2'''

run '''ls '''

Highlight '''test1''' and '''test2'''.
||

To create '''test 1''' and '''test 2 files''' in the current directory, type '''touch''' '''test 1''' '''test 2''' and Press '''Enter'''.

Command '''touch''' is used to create files in the current directory.

Then run '''l s. '''

This reflects the change on screen.
|-
|| Type''' alias rm="rm -i"''' alias space rm equal to within double quotes rm space hyphen i.

press '''Enter'''
|| The '''hyphen i''' option of the '''r m''' command makes deletion interactive. So, we can create an alias for the '''r m''' command.

Type '''alias space rm equal to within double quotes rm space hyphen i'''..
|-
|| Type''' rm test1'''

Press '''Enter'''
|| When we run '''r m test 1''', the file is deleted without showing any output.
|-
||
|| The system asks to remove regular empty file '''test 1.'''Type '''y''' and press '''Enter''' to confirm deletion.Now, if we run '''r m''' '''test 1''' and press '''Enter'''.The file is no longer present and as it is already deleted.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt about:
* Linux environment and shell variables
* View and modify environment variables
* Navigate to directories and use tilde shortcuts
* Re-run commands using history and aliases
* Customize prompts and make rm interactive
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Assignment'''

As an assignment
# Type env and list all environment variables.
# Identify the values of HOME, SHELL, LOGNAME, and PATH.
# Temporarily change your PS1 prompt to display your username followed by @Linux:~$.
# Try creating an alias for a long command and use it.
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited, SINE IIT Bombay.Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Redirecting-Streams-and-Pipes/English

2026-01-23T13:12:56Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''TITLE: Redirecting Streams and Pipes.''' '''Author:''' EduPyramids '''Keywords:''' Standard input,standard output, standard error, redirection, pipes, file descriptors, i..."

'''TITLE: Redirecting Streams and Pipes.'''

'''Author:''' EduPyramids

'''Keywords:''' Standard input,standard output, standard error, redirection, pipes, file descriptors, input redirection, output redirection, error redirection, pipes, pipelining, wc, ls, more, Linux terminal, command chaining, EduPyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Redirecting Streams and Pipes.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''

In this tutorial, you will learn to:
* Identify stdin, stdout and stderr streams in Linux.
* Redirect standard output and error to files using '''redirection operators''' (>, >>, 2>, 2>>).
* Explain file descriptors and their role in redirection.
* Connect multiple Linux commands using pipes (|) to manipulate data efficiently.
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Identify standard input, standard output and standard error streams in Linux.
* Redirect standard output and error to files using '''redirection operators'''
* Explain file descriptors and their role in redirection.
* Connect multiple Linux commands using pipes (|) to manipulate data efficiently.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using

'''Ubuntu OS version 24 point zero 4'''
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should have '''Ubuntu version 24 point zero 4.'''
* For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial
# '''rsp-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| Press''' Ctrl + Alt + T '''keys
|| Let us get started.

Open the terminal.
|-
|| Open Terminal

Type '''cat aaa '''press''' Enter'''

Highlight Errored output.

'''cat: aaa: No such file or directory'''
|| Let’s type '''cat a a a''' and press '''Enter'''.

Since this file does not exist, terminal shows an error message.

Notice that errors are reported on the terminal.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''streams.png'''
|| '''Streams:''' are continuous flow of data used for input, output, and errors.

'''File Descriptors:''' are numbers used by Linux to identify open files and streams.

'''Bash:''' is a Linux shell that runs commands and manages input and output.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Standard Streams'''

'''std-streams.png'''
|| Linux commands handle '''input''', '''output''', and '''errors''' using '''streams''' and''' file descriptors'''.

Linux uses three standard streams:
* '''s t d in (0)''' for input
* '''s t d out (1)''' for output
* '''s t d e r r (2)''' for errors

By default, the standard streams are connected to the terminal.

Using '''redirection''', we can change this behavior.

Standard input can be redirected using the''' less than(<)''' operator.
|-
|| In a terminal type '''cat >test1.txt '''press''' Enter

Type: Sample to learn Linux.

'''Press''' Enter.'''Press''' Ctrl '''and''' D '''keys together.
|| Now, let us learn to redirect standard input.

Let's create a file named''' test1 dot t x t''' in the current directory and add some text to it.

Users can pause the video and create the file '''test1 dot t x t'''.
|-
|| Type '''wc < test1.txt'''Press '''Enter.'''

Point to the output on the terminal.
|| Now, type '''w c space less than space''' '''test1 dot t x t''' and press '''Enter.

w c''' displays the number of lines, words, and characters in the '''test1 dot t x t '''file.

This command''' '''reads the file using '''s t d in''', showing input redirection.
|-
||
|| Now, let us learn to redirect '''standard output''' and '''standard error'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Channel Number'''

Think of '''n''' as a channel number.

Linux uses numbers to decide where output goes.
* '''n '''identifies the output channel.
* '''>''' means send output
* '''filename''' is where the output is saved
|| There are two ways to redirect them to a file:

Think of '''n''' as a channel number.

Linux uses numbers to decide where output goes.
* '''n '''identifies the output channel.
* '''Greater than(>)''' means send output
* '''filename''' is where the output is saved
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Redirection Operations'''

'''n >filename''' means '''send output '''from channel''' n '''to a '''file'''.

You need write permission for that file.'''n >> '''redirects output from file descriptor '''n''' to a file.

If the file exists, output is appended, not overwritten.If''' n''' is not specified, '''stdout (1) '''is used.

> is the same as 1>'''.'''

To redirect the error stream, use 2> or 2'''>>'''.''' '''
|| So, '''n greater than(>)''' '''filename''' means '''send output '''from channel''' n '''to a '''file'''.

You need write permission for that file.

'''n greater than greater than(>>) '''redirects output from file descriptor '''n''' to a file.

If the file exists, output is appended, not overwritten.

If''' n''' is not specified, '''stdout (1) '''is used.

So, '''greater than(''' '''>)''' is the same as 1 '''greater than(>).'''

To redirect the error stream, use 2 '''greater than(>)''' or 2 '''greater than greater than (>>)'''.''' '''
|-
|| Switch to TerminalShow the terminal output of '''wc command'''
|| Let us see this practically.Suppose we want to save the output to a file for later use. By default, '''w c''' sends output to '''s t d out'''

Redirecting '''s t d out''' saves the output to a file instead.
|-
|| Type''' wc test1.txt > wc-results.txt'''

Type '''cat wc-results.txt'''

Point to the output
|| Type: '''w c''' '''space''' '''test1 dot t x t''' '''space greater than space w c hyphen results dot t x t'''

Press '''Enter'''.Now, to verify this, display the contents of '''w c hyphen results dot t x t''' using the '''cat''' command.

Type

'''cat space w c hyphen results dot t x t'''

And press '''Enter'''

The output from '''w c '''has been written to the file.
|-
|| Type: '''echo "hello" > test2.txt''' press '''Enter'''

Show the output line with test2.txt

Type '''wc test2.txt > wc-results.txt'''

Type '''cat wc-results.txt '''press''' Enter'''
|| Let me create a new file by typing '''echo space “hello” space greater than space test2 dot t x t''' and press '''Enter.'''

We see the file''' test2 dot t x t''' is created.

Type '''w c space test2 dot t x t space greater than space w c hyphen results dot t x t'''.

The contents of '''w c''' '''hyphen results dot t x t '''will be overwritten.

Let us verify using the '''cat '''command.
|-
|| Type

'''wc test1.txt >> wc-results.txt ''' and '''Press Enter'''

Type '''cat wc-results.txt'''
|| Instead, if we run:'''w c space test1 dot t x t greater than greater than (>>) w c hyphen results dot t x t '''and press '''Enter.'''

The new contents will not overwrite the existing contents of''' w c hyphen results dot t x t.'''

Instead, the output will be appended to the file.

Let us verify using the '''cat '''command

Let me clear the terminal.
|-
||
|| Redirecting '''standard error''' is done in a similar way.

The only difference is that we need to specify the file descriptor number of '''standard error.'''

This number comes before the '''greater than (>)''' or '''greater than greater than(>>)''' sign.
|-
|| Type '''wc aaa '''press '''Enter

|| Highlight error. '''There is no file named''' a a a'''.Type: '''w c space a a a '''and press '''Enter.'''

The shell will display an error as'''No such file or directory.'''
|-
||
|| If we don’t want error messages to show on the screen, we can redirect them to a file.
|-
|| Type: '''wc aaa 2>errorlog.txt''' and press Enter
|| To redirect the error, type the following command:'''w c space a a a space 2 greater than(>) errorlog dot t x t''' and press '''Enter'''.

Now, the error will not appear on the terminal.Instead, it will be written to the file '''errorlog dot t x t '''
|-
|| Type: '''cat errorlog.txt '''press''' Enter'''
|| We can check the contents of '''errorlog dot t x t''' by typing.'''cat''' space''' errorlog dot t x t '''press''' Enter.

'''This will display the error message that was redirected from the terminal.
|-
|| Type '''cat bbb 2> errorlog.txt

Press Enter.

'''Type: '''cat errorlog.txt '''press''' Enter'''
|| Now, suppose we make another error by typing:'''cat space b b b space 2 greater than(>)space errorlog dot t x t '''and''' '''press''' Enter'''

The previous contents of '''errorlog dot t x t''' will be overwritten.

The new error message will replace the old one.

Type '''cat''' '''space errorlog dot t x t '''and''' '''press''' Enter''' to see the changed error.
|-
|| Type '''wc aaa 2>>errorlog.txt'''

Press '''Enter.'''
|| But what if we want to keep a record of all errors instead of overwriting them? We can append errors to a file using:'''w c space a a a space 2 greater than greater than(>>) errorlog dot t x t''' press '''Enter'''.

Now, all error messages will be added to '''errorlog dot t x t''' instead of replacing the previous ones.

To keep all errors instead of overwriting them, we can '''append''' them to a file.
|-
|| '''cat errorlog.txt''' press '''Enter'''
|| We can check all the accumulated errors by typing:'''cat''' space '''errorlog dot t x t '''and press''' Enter.''' This will display all the error messages that were appended to the file.
|-
|| Type

'''wc aaaa.txt'''

Press '''Enter'''

Show the outputstdin , stdoutput, std error.
|| Now type:'''w c''' space '''a a a a''' '''dot t x t '''and press '''Enter'''.

The error caused by this command is displayed on the terminal.

If no redirection is used, future errors will also be shown on the terminal.

We saw how the three streams, '''standard output''', '''standard input''', and '''standard error''' can be redirected separately.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Pipelining'''

'''pipelining.png'''
|| We can gain more control if we can manipulate multiple streams together.

This process is called '''''pipelining'''''.

'''Pipes''' link commands into a chain.The output of one command becomes the input of the next and so on.

A pipeline connects multiple commands using the pipe, that is, vertical bar symbol.
|-
|| '''Image: pipe1.png'''

command1''' |''' command2 '''| '''command3''' | '''command4
|| A pipeline looks like this:

Here, the output of command1 is sent as input to command2,then its output is sent to command3, and so on, forming a chain of commands.
|-
|| Back to terminal
|| Suppose we want to know the total number of files and directories in the current directory. We can achieve this using a pipeline of commands.
|-
||
|| Let me clear the terminal.
|-
|| '''Type cat test1.txt''' press''' Enter'''
|| To see the contents of the file type:'''cat space test1 dot t x t '''and press '''Enter'''

Type '''l s '''and press '''Enter'''.This will display the list of files and directories.
|-
|| Type: '''ls -l > test1.txt '''press''' Enter'''
|| To redirect type '''l s space hyphen l greater than (>) space test1 dot t x t '''and press '''Enter.''' The file list will be saved in '''test1''' '''dot t x t''' instead of the terminal.
|-
|| Type '''wc -l test1.txt''' press''' Enter'''
|| Now, to count the total lines, we can use:'''w c space hyphen l space test1 dot t x t''' and press '''Enter'''. This gives us the total number of files and directories.
|-
|| Type '''ls -l | wc -l '''press '''Enter'''
|| We can do this more efficiently using a pipe:

'''l s space hyphen l space vertical bar space w c space hyphen l '''and press '''Enter.'''

Here, the output of the '''l s hyphen l''' command is sent directly as input to the''' w c hyphen l''' command.

The output appears on the terminal, giving the total files and directories without an extra file.
|-
|| Type''' cd /usr/bin '''and press''' Enter.'''

Highlight changed '''directory'''.
|| We can create longer chains of commands using '''pipes'''.One common use of pipes is for reading multipage displays.

First, navigate to the''' slash u s r slash bin''' directory.

Type''' c d space slash u s r slash bin '''and press''' Enter.'''

Now, we are in the '''slash u s r slash bin''' directory.
|-
|| Type: '''ls -l press Enter'''

Type: '''ls -l | more '''press '''Enter'''
|| Now, run:'''l s space hyphen l '''and press''' Enter.'''The output is too long to view on the terminal.

Using a pipe with '''more''' lets us view it page by page:

Type''' l s space hyphen l space vertical bar space more''' and press '''Enter'''.

Here, the output of '''l s hyphen l''' is passed to '''more''', letting us view one screen at a time.
|-
|| Press '''Enter'''

Press '''q'''
|| Press '''Enter''' to scroll through the list one line at a time.Press '''q''' to exit the '''more''' command and return to the terminal.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, you will learn to:
* Identify stdin, stdout and stderr streams in Linux.
* Redirect standard output and error to files using '''redirection operators''' (>, >>, 2>, and 2>>).
* Explain file descriptors and their role in redirection.
* Connect multiple Linux commands using pipes (|) to manipulate data efficiently.
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

'''Assignment'''
# Create a file named '''mydata.txt '''and add 5 lines of text in it.
# Count the number of lines in '''mydata.txt''' and store the result in '''lines.txt'''.
# Display '''mydata.txt''' page by page in the terminal using '''more''' with a pipe.
# Display a file '''nofile.txt''' and redirect the error message to '''errorlog.txt'''.
# Count words in '''mydata.txt''' and show the result using a pipe.
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 13'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by '''EduPyramids''' Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.

Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Working-with-Regular-Files/English

2026-01-23T07:22:40Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script: Working with Regular Files in Linux. '''Authors:''' '''EduPyramids''' '''Keywords:''' Linux, regular files, cp command, mv command, rm command, cmp c..."

'''Title of the script: Working with Regular Files in Linux.

'''Authors:''' '''EduPyramids'''

'''Keywords:''' Linux, regular files, cp command, mv command, rm command, cmp command, wc command, EduPyramids, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''

|| Welcome to this Spoken tutorial on '''Working with Regular Files '''in''' Linux.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
* Copy, move, and delete regular files in '''Linux'''
* Use file-handling commands such as '''cp''', '''mv''', and '''rm'''
* Compare files and count lines, words, and characters using '''cmp''' and '''wc'''
* Use important command options to manage files safely.
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:
* Copy, move, and delete regular files in '''Linux'''
* Use file-handling commands such as '''c p''', '''m v''', and '''r m'''
* Compare files and count lines, words, and characters using '''c m p''' and '''w c'''
* Use important command options to manage files safely.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using

'''Ubuntu OS '''version 24 point 04.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,

Learners should have '''Ubuntu '''version''' 24 point 04'''.

For the prerequisite of '''Linux''' tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial
# '''wrf-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let’s get started with the '''c p''' command.

Let’s see what a '''c p''' command does?
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''cp command'''

* The '''cp''' command is used to copy files and directories in Linux.
* It creates a duplicate of a file or directory at a specified location.
* It does not change or delete the original file
* '''cp SOURCE DESTINATION'''

copies a file to another location
* '''cp SOURCE DIRECTORY'''

copies one or more files into a directory
|| * The '''c p''' command is used to copy files and directories in '''Linux'''.
* It creates a duplicate of a file or directory at a specified location.
* It does not change or delete the original file
* The command '''c p SOURCE DESTINATION''', copies a file to another location and
* The''' c p SOURCE DIRECTORY, '''copies one or more files into a directory.
|-
||
|| Let’s see how to copy a file using the '''c p''' command.
|-
|| Press '''Ctrl+Alt+T '''keys''' together.'''Type: '''mkdir testdir '''press '''Enter'''

Point to''' testdir''' '''directory.'''

Type: '''cd testdir'''Highlight the changed directory

Type: '''pwd '''press '''Enter'''

Highlight the '''/home/spoken/testdir'''
|| Let us open the terminal.

Let us make a directory named '''test d i r''' in the home folder.

Type '''m k d i r test d i r '''press '''Enter'''.

The directory '''test d i r''' is created in the home directory.

Let us change the directory from '''home''' to '''test d i r'''.

Type '''c d space test d i r''' and press '''Enter'''.

We can see that the directory has changed to '''test d i r'''.

Now type '''p w d''' and press '''Enter'''.

My current working directory is '''slash home slash spoken slash test d i r'''.
|-
|| Type '''cat >test1'''

Type:''' I am using Linux. '''and press '''Enter.Press Ctrl + D keys together'''

Type''' cat test1'''

Type''' cp test1 test2 '''and press''' Enter'''.

Point to the files test1 and test2
|| Let’s create a file by typing''' cat space''' '''greater than test1'''.

After pressing '''Enter''', the command waits for input from the user.

Now I will type, '''I am using Linux. '''and press '''Enter'''.

Press''' Ctrl''' and''' D '''keys to come out of input mode.

Let’s type '''cat space test1''' to see the content of the file '''test1'''.

Now type '''c p space''' '''test1 space''' '''test2 '''and''' '''press''' Enter'''.

This copies the content of '''test1''' into a new file '''test2''' in the same directory.

If the file '''test2''' does not exist, it will be created.

If it exists, its content is overwritten.
|-
|| Type '''cat test2 '''and press''' Enter.'''
|| To check type '''cat space test2''' and press''' Enter'''.

The original file '''test1 '''remains unchanged.

'''test1''' is the '''source file''' and '''test2''' is the '''destination file'''.
|-
|| Type '''cp /home/spoken/testdir/test1 /home/spoken/test2 '''and press '''Enter'''.

Show in side by side manner

Type''' ls /home/spoken''' and press''' Enter.'''
|| We can also copy files between directories.

Type''' c p space slash home slash spoken slash test d i r slash test1 space slash home slash spoken slash test2 '''and press''' Enter'''.

This will copy the file '''test1 '''from '''test d i r directory '''to''' home directory '''as '''test2'''.

Type '''l s''' space '''slash home slash spoken '''and press''' Enter'''.

The output lists the contents of the directory.

We can see that file '''test2''' is in the home directory.
|-
|| Type '''cp /home/spoken/testdir/test1 /home/spoken/''' and press''' Enter'''
|| To keep the same file name, we need not specify its name at the destination.

Let’s type''' c p space slash home slash spoken slash test d i r slash test1 space slash home slash spoken '''and press '''Enter'''.

This will copy the file '''test1''' from '''slash home slash spoken slash test dir slash''' to the home directory.

The destination file will also be named as '''test1'''.
|-
|| Type '''cp test1 test3 '''press''' Enter'''

Type '''cp test1 test4 '''press''' Enter'''

Type '''ls '''press '''Enter'''

Highlight '''test1, test2, test3''' and '''test4'''

Type: '''cp test3 test4 /home/spoken '''and press''' Enter.'''

Point to''' test3''' and '''test4 '''in the''' home directory.'''
|| While copying multiple files, we need not specify the destination file name.

First, let us create more files by copying from the existing file.

Type '''c p space test1 space test3 '''and press '''Enter'''.

Again type '''c p space test1 space test4 '''and press''' Enter'''.

To list the files type''' l s '''and press''' Enter'''.

Output shows that '''test1''', '''test2''',''' test3''' and '''test4''' are in the current directory.

Now let us copy multiple files to the parent directory.

Type '''c p space test3 space test4 space slash home slash spoken'''.

Now''' test3''' and '''test4''' are also copied to the home directory.

Notice that all files are copied to the home directory with the same names.
|-
|| Type '''cd .. '''and press '''Enter.'''

Highlight the home directoryType '''cp testdir/ test '''and''' '''press''' Enter'''.

Highlight '''cp: -r not specified; omitting directory 'testdir/''''

'''Type cp -R testdir/ test '''and press''' Enter.'''

Point to '''test''' folder

Type '''ls '''and''' '''press''' Enter.'''

Type''' ls test '''and''' '''press''' Enter.'''
|| Let’s type '''c d space dot dot '''and press''' Enter''' to move to the parent directory.

Let’s type''' c p space test d i r0 slash space test '''and''' '''press''' Enter'''.

Here we get an error;

'''hyphen r not specified; omitting directory test dir slash.'''

Normally, the '''c p''' command cannot copy directories with files.

Using the '''hyphen R''' option with '''c p '''allows us to copy them.

Type '''c p space hyphen R space test dir slash space test''' and press '''Enter'''.

Observe that it copied the entire''' testdir directory '''recursively.

All files and subdirectories were copied into a new directory named''' test.'''

Type '''l s''' and press '''Enter'''.

We can see a directory named''' test'''.

Now type '''l s''' '''space''' '''test''' and press '''Enter'''.

The output lists the files present in the '''test''' directory.

If '''test''' does not exist, it is created as a copy of '''test dir'''.If the '''test''' exists, '''test dir''' is copied inside it as a subdirectory.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''mv command'''
* The '''mv''' command moves files and directories.
* It is used to rename files or directory or move them to another directory.
* Unlike the cp command, mv does not create a copy of the file.
|| The '''m v''' command moves files and directories.

It is used to rename files or directory or move them to another directory.

Unlike the '''c p''' command, '''m v''' does not create a copy of the file.
|-
|| Type '''mv test1 test2 '''and press '''Enter'''.

Type '''cat >test1''' and press '''Enter'''.

Type the prompt: '''I am using Linux.''' and press '''Enter'''.Press '''ctrl''' and '''D''' '''keys''' together.

Type '''mv -i test2 test3 '''press''' Enter'''

Prompt asks: '''overwrite test3?'''

Type '''no '''press''' Enter'''
|| In the terminal, type '''m v space test1 space test2''' and press '''Enter'''.

This renames the file '''test1''' to '''test2'''.

If '''test2''' already exists, it is overwritten without warning.Let us again create '''test1''' file by using the '''cat''' command.

Now type '''m v space hyphen i space test2 space test3''' and press '''Enter'''.The '''hyphen i''' option asks for confirmation before overwriting the files.

Prompt asks: '''overwrite test3 question mark'''

Type '''no '''and press''' Enter'''.

This will not overwrite the '''test3''' file.
|-
|| Type '''mv test2 test3 test4 /home/spoken/testdir '''and''' '''press''' Enter'''.

Type '''ls /home/spoken/testdir '''press '''Enter'''
|| Like '''c p''',''' m v''' can move multiple files, but the destination must be a directory.

Type '''m v space test2 space test3 space test4 space slash home slash spoken slash test dir '''and press '''Enter'''.

This command moves the files '''test2''', '''test3''', and '''test4''' to the specified directory.

Press '''Enter'''.

Files are moved from the current directory to '''slash home slash spoken slash test dir '''directory.

To check, type''' l s space slash home slash spoken slash test dir '''and''' '''press''' Enter'''.

The output shows that the files have been moved.
|-
||
|| The next command is '''r m'''.
|-
|| '''Slide''' '''8'''

'''rm command'''
* The '''rm''' command in Linux is used to remove files and directories.
* It permanently deletes the specified files from the system
|| The '''r m''' command in Linux is used to remove files and directories.

It permanently deletes the specified files from the system.
|-
|| Show Terminal and Files side by side. Type''' rm testdir/test1 and '''press '''Enter.'''

Type''' rm testdir/test2 testdir/test3 '''press''' Enter'''

'''Highlight test4 file.'''
|| Type '''r m space test dir slash test1 '''and''' '''press '''Enter.'''

This removes the file '''test1''' from the '''test dir''' directory.

We can use it with multiple files also.

Type''' r m space test dir slash test2 space test dir slash test3 '''press''' Enter'''.This will remove the files '''test2''' and '''test3'''.

Only '''test4''' is available in the '''test dir''' directory.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''-f and -r option'''
* Use the '''-f '''option to force deletion.
* The '''-r '''option is commonly used to remove directories recursively.
* '''rm''' deletes files.
* '''rmdir''' deletes only empty directories.
* To delete a directory containing files and subdirectories, use both options together: '''rm''' '''-rf'''.
|| Sometimes a file is write-protected, and '''rm''' cannot delete it.

The '''hyphen f '''option forces deletion, even for write-protected items.

The '''hyphen r''' option removes directories and their contents recursively.

The '''r m''' command removes files.

The '''r m dir''' command removes empty directories only.

To delete a directory with files and subfolders, use '''r m hyphen r f '''together.
|-
|| Highlight '''testdir folder'''Type''' rm -rf testdir '''press''' EnterHighlight it is removed from files'''Type '''ls '''press '''Enter'''
|| Type''' r m space hyphen r f space test dir '''and''' '''press''' Enter'''.

This deletes '''test dir''' and all its files and subdirectories recursively.

Type: '''l s''' and press '''Enter'''.

Observe that the''' test dir''' directory is deleted.
|-
||
|| Sometimes we need to check whether two files are identical.

If they are the same, we can delete one of them.
|-
||
|| For this, we use the '''c m p''' command.

But first let’s learn what '''cmp''' command is?
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''cmp commands'''
* '''cmp''' compares two files '''byte by byte'''.
* If the files are identical, it shows no output, only the prompt.
* If there are differences, '''cmp''' shows the location of the first mismatch.
||
* '''c m p''' compares two files '''byte by byte'''.
* If the files are identical, it shows no output, only the prompt.
* If there are differences, '''c m p''' shows the location of the first mismatch.
|-
|| Type''' cat >sample1 '''press''' EnterType: '''This is a Linux file.

Press''' Ctrl '''and''' D '''keys''' '''together''' Type cat >sample2 '''press''' EnterType: '''This is a Unix file.

Press''' Ctrl '''and''' D '''keys''' '''together.
|| Let us see how the '''c m p command''' works.

We will create two sample files '''sample 1''' and '''sample 2''' using the '''cat''' command.

Create two files with '''cat''':
* '''sample1''': This is a Linux file.
* '''sample2''': This is a Unix file.
|-
|| Type''' cmp sample1 sample2 '''press '''Enter.

Highlight:sample1 sample2 differ: byte 11, line 1'''

|| Type''' c m p space sample1 space sample2 '''press '''Enter'''.

We can see how the differences between the first and second file are highlighted.

Output is shown as''' sample1 sample2 differ: byte 11''',''' line 1'''.
|-
|| Type''' cat sample2 '''press '''Enter'''

Type''' wc sample2 '''press '''Enter'''

'''Highlight output'''
|| Next we will see the '''wc''' command.'''w c''' counts the number of lines, words, and characters in a file.

For example, Type '''cat''' '''space''' '''sample2''' and press '''Enter'''.

The file '''sample2''' contains some text.

Now Type '''w c space sample2''' and press '''Enter'''.

Using '''w c''', we see it has '''1 line''',''' 5 words''', '''and 21 characters'''.
|-
||
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* Copy, move, and delete regular files in Linux
* Use file-handling commands such as '''cp''', '''mv''', and '''rm'''
* Compare files and count lines, words, and characters using '''cmp''' and '''wc'''
* Use important command options to manage files safely
|| Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

As an assignment,
# Copy one file to another directory using '''cp''' and verify the contents.
# Use '''cp''' '''-i''' and '''cp''' '''-b''' to observe how Linux prevents accidental overwriting.
# Compare two files using '''cmp''' and note the position of the first difference.
# Use the '''wc''' command to find the number of lines, words, and characters in a file.
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 13'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay. Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/File-System-in-Linux/English

2026-01-15T07:16:16Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title of the Script: File System''' '''in Linux'''

'''Author: EduPyramids Team.'''

'''Keywords: '''Linux, terminal, file, directories, pwd, ls command, cat command, video tutorial, EduPyramids.

'''Prerequisite tutorial: General Purpose Utilities'''

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this''' Spoken tutorial '''on''' File System''' '''in Linux'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial we will learn to:
* Define Files, directories and inode.
* Create a file and add text in it.
* Create directories and
* Change and remove directories safely.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using,

'''Ubuntu OS version 24 point 04'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

To follow this tutorial,

Learners should know the basics of using the linux terminal.

For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should know the basics of using the Linux terminal.
* For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial

# '''fs-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us discuss files and directories.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Files'''
* In real life, a file is used to store documents and papers.
* Similarly, in '''Linux''', a file is a container used to store information.
|| Now let us understand what a file is?In '''Linux''' almost everything is treated as a file.

In real life, a file is used to store documents and papers.

Similarly, in '''Linux''', a file is a container used to store information.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Directory'''
* A directory is a collection of files and other sub-directories.
* A directory helps us organize our files in a systematic manner.
|| Let us now see what a directory is?

A directory is a collection of files and other sub-directories.

A directory helps us organize our files in a systematic manner.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''inode'''

'''inode.png'''
|| Every file has its own properties.

It has a name, creation, modification time and permission.

These properties are stored in a structure called '''inode'''.

An inode is a data structure identified by a unique number.

It is used by the system to identify a file.

It stores information about a file such as size, permissions, and ownership.

It also stores timestamps and the disk location of the file.

File name is only for human convenience.

A directory does not store files directly.

It is a file that maps file names to their corresponding inode numbers.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Linux File System hierarchy'''

'''Linux-filesystem.png-'''
|| All the files are connected in a tree structure.

At the top of this tree is the '''root directory''' indicated by slash(/).

Every file and directory exists under root(/).
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Types of Files'''

'''types-of-files1.png'''
|| Types of files in '''Linux'''.

Linux has three main types of files:
# '''Regular files : '''They store data as a stream of characters.

For example: text files, images, videos
# '''Directories: '''Organize files and other directories.
# '''Device files: '''These represent hardware such as disks, USBs, Cds.

They can be read and written like files.
|-
|| Screencast:

Press''' Ctrl, Alt '''and''' T keys '''on your''' keyboard'''
|| Let us now open the '''terminal '''window.
|-
|| '''Type pwd '''

Point to the output

'''/home/spoken'''
|| By default we are always in the home directory.

Let me type '''pwd '''and press '''Enter'''.

The output shows '''/home/spoken '''as the present working directory.
|-
|| Type''' ls -l '''and press '''Enter'''.
|| Now type '''ls space hyphen l''' and press '''Enter'''.

Terminal shows the following output.
* List of all files with file permissions,
* file owner's name,
* file size in bytes
* last modification time,
* File or directory name
|-
|| Point to the information on the terminal.
|| Instead of displaying all information on the screen, we can store it in a file.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''ls -l >fileinfo''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| So type '''ls space hyphen l space greater than fileinfo''' and''' '''press''' Enter'''.

Observe that nothing is displayed on the screen.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''cat fileinfo''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| To see the content of the files we have to use '''cat''' command.

So type '''cat space fileinfo '''and''' '''press''' Enter'''.

Output shows the file contents.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''cat > file1.txt''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| The''' cat''' command is mainly used to display file contents.

It can also be used to create or append files.

Type '''cat space greater than file1 dot''' '''txt '''and''' '''press''' Enter.'''
|-
|| Type '''I am creating a new file.''' and press Enter.

Press '''Ctrl + D keys''' to end the input.
|| After pressing '''Enter''', the command waits for input from the user.

So let’s type '''I am creating a new file.''' and press '''Enter'''.

Whatever we type will be written into the file.

The input is ended by pressing '''Ctrl '''and''' D keys '''together.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''cat >>file1.txt '''and press '''Enter'''.
|| If you wish to append to the end of an existing file type

'''cat space greater than greater than file1 dot txt''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''This is a new line in the file. ''' and''' '''press''' Enter.'''

Press '''Ctrl''' + '''D''' keys together.
|| Again the command waits for input from the user.

So type, '''This is a new line in the file'''. and press '''Enter'''.

Press '''Ctrl''' and '''D''' keys together to end the input.
|-
|| Type: '''cat file1.txt '''and press '''Enter'''.
|| To see the contents written in file1 type,

'''cat space file1 dot txt''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Type: '''clear '''and Press '''Enter.'''
|| Type '''clear''' to clear the terminal window.
|-
|| Type:''' mkdir test1''' and Press '''Enter'''.

While recording, show the directory creation in the home directory.

Place the terminal and home directory side-by-side.
|| Let us now learn to create directories.

To create a directory I will type '''mkdir space test1 '''and press '''Enter.'''

If no output appears it means that the command has executed successfully.
|-
|| Type '''mkdir test2 test3 '''and press '''Enter'''
|| Let us now create multiple directories.

So I will type '''mkdir space test2 space test3 '''and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Type '''mkdir -p test4/test4.1''' and press '''Enter.'''

Show the folders '''test4 and test4.1'''

Highlight '''-p'''.
|| Now to show the directory hierarchy let me type '''mkdir space hyphen p space test4 slash test4 point 1''' and press '''Enter'''.

This will create a directory''' test4 point 1 '''within the '''test4 directory.'''

Here the argument '''hyphen p '''creates parent '''directories '''if they do not already exist.

Then''' test4 point 1 directory '''is created inside '''test4'''.
|-
||
|| Now let us learn to move into various directories.
|-
|| Type:''' cd test1 '''press '''Enter'''.
|| Type '''cd space test1''' and press''' Enter'''.

We are now in the '''test1''' directory.
|-
|| Type '''cd .. ''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Let us go back to the parent directory.

So type '''cd space dot dot'''
|-
|| Type: '''cd test''' press Tab keys twice .

Press the backspace key to erase the prompt.
|| Now type '''cd test''' and press the '''Tab''' key twice.

All the directories with the name test will be displayed.

Press the backspace key to erase the prompt.
|-
|| Type '''cd test4/test4.1 '''and''' press Enter.'''
|| Type''' cd test4/test4 point 1 '''and press '''Enter '''to move to''' test4 point 1'''.
|-
|| '''Type: cd ../../'''

Press the''' Enter '''key.
|| Now let us learn to do multi-level navigation to come back to the home directory.

Let me type '''cd space dot dot slash dot dot slash'''

Press the '''Enter''' key.

Here the first two dots move up one level.

Second two dots moves up one more directory level.

Press the '''Enter''' key.
|-
|| Type: '''rmdir test1''' and press '''Enter.'''
|| Now we will learn to delete the created test 1 directory.

Type '''rmdir space test1''' and press '''Enter.'''

Now, we can see that the test1 directory is removed.
|-
|| Type: '''rmdir test4 test4/test4.1'''

'''Highlight the output: rmdir: failed to remove 'test4': Directory not empty'''
|| Type '''rmdir space test4 space test4 slash test4 point 1'''.

The output shows

'''rmdir: failed to remove 'test4': Directory not empty'''.

This indicates that if the directory is not empty it cannot be deleted.

A directory must be empty before it can be removed using''' rmdir'''.
|-
||
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial we have learn to:
* Define Files, directories and inode
* Create a file and add text in it
* Create directories and
* Change and remove directories safely
|| Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Assignment'''
* Create a file named '''myfile''' using the cat command
* Write one line of text in it.
* Display the contents of '''myfile''' using the cat command.
* Create a directory named '''mydir''' and create sub-directories inside it.
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/File-System-in-Linux/English

2026-01-15T07:12:07Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: File System''' '''in Linux''' '''Author: EduPyramids Team.''' '''Keywords: '''Linux, terminal, file, directories, pwd, ls command, cat command, video..."

'''Title of the Script: File System''' '''in Linux'''

'''Author: EduPyramids Team.'''

'''Keywords: '''Linux, terminal, file, directories, pwd, ls command, cat command, video tutorial, EduPyramids.

'''Prerequisite tutorial: General Purpose Utilities'''

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this''' Spoken tutorial '''on''' File System''' '''in Linux'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2 Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial we will learn to:
* Define Files, directories and inode.
* Create a file and add text in it.
* Create directories and
* Change and remove directories safely.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using,

'''Ubuntu OS version 24 point 04'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

To follow this tutorial,

Learners should know the basics of using the linux terminal.

For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should know the basics of using the Linux terminal.
* For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial

# '''fs-commands.txt'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us discuss files and directories.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Files'''
* In real life, a file is used to store documents and papers.
* Similarly, in '''Linux''', a file is a container used to store information.
|| Now let us understand what a file is?In '''Linux''' almost everything is treated as a file.

In real life, a file is used to store documents and papers.

Similarly, in '''Linux''', a file is a container used to store information.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Directory'''
* A directory is a collection of files and other sub-directories.
* A directory helps us organize our files in a systematic manner.
|| Let us now see what a directory is?

A directory is a collection of files and other sub-directories.

A directory helps us organize our files in a systematic manner.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''inode'''

Image

'''inode.png'''
|| Every file has its own properties.

It has a name, creation, modification time and permission.

These properties are stored in a structure called '''inode'''.

An inode is a data structure identified by a unique number.

It is used by the system to identify a file.

It stores information about a file such as size, permissions, and ownership.

It also stores timestamps and the disk location of the file.

File name is only for human convenience.

A directory does not store files directly.

It is a file that maps file names to their corresponding inode numbers.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Linux File System hierarchy'''

'''Linux-filesystem.png-'''
|| All the files are connected in a tree structure.

At the top of this tree is the '''root directory''' indicated by slash(/).

Every file and directory exists under root(/).
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Types of Files'''

'''types-of-files1.png'''
|| Types of files in '''Linux'''.

Linux has three main types of files:
# '''Regular files : '''They store data as a stream of characters.

For example: text files, images, videos
# '''Directories: '''Organize files and other directories.
# '''Device files: '''These represent hardware such as disks, USBs, Cds.

They can be read and written like files.
|-
|| Screencast:

Press''' Ctrl, Alt '''and''' T keys '''on your''' keyboard'''
|| Let us now open the '''terminal '''window.
|-
|| '''Type pwd '''

Point to the output

'''/home/spoken'''
|| By default we are always in the home directory.

Let me type '''pwd '''and press '''Enter'''.

The output shows '''/home/spoken '''as the present working directory.
|-
|| Type''' ls -l '''and press '''Enter'''.
|| Now type '''ls space hyphen l''' and press '''Enter'''.

Terminal shows the following output.
* List of all files with file permissions,
* file owner's name,
* file size in bytes
* last modification time,
* File or directory name
|-
|| Point to the information on the terminal.
|| Instead of displaying all information on the screen, we can store it in a file.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''ls -l >fileinfo''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| So type '''ls space hyphen l space greater than fileinfo''' and''' '''press''' Enter'''.

Observe that nothing is displayed on the screen.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''cat fileinfo''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| To see the content of the files we have to use '''cat''' command.

So type '''cat space fileinfo '''and''' '''press''' Enter'''.

Output shows the file contents.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''cat > file1.txt''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| The''' cat''' command is mainly used to display file contents.

It can also be used to create or append files.

Type '''cat space greater than file1 dot''' '''txt '''and''' '''press''' Enter.'''
|-
|| Type '''I am creating a new file.''' and press Enter.

Press '''Ctrl + D keys''' to end the input.
|| After pressing '''Enter''', the command waits for input from the user.

So let’s type '''I am creating a new file.''' and press '''Enter'''.

Whatever we type will be written into the file.

The input is ended by pressing '''Ctrl '''and''' D keys '''together.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''cat >>file1.txt '''and press '''Enter'''.
|| If you wish to append to the end of an existing file type

'''cat space greater than greater than file1 dot txt''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''This is a new line in the file. ''' and''' '''press''' Enter.'''

Press '''Ctrl''' + '''D''' keys together.
|| Again the command waits for input from the user.

So type, '''This is a new line in the file'''. and press '''Enter'''.

Press '''Ctrl''' and '''D''' keys together to end the input.
|-
|| Type: '''cat file1.txt '''and press '''Enter'''.
|| To see the contents written in file1 type,

'''cat space file1 dot txt''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Type: '''clear '''and Press '''Enter.'''
|| Type '''clear''' to clear the terminal window.
|-
|| Type:''' mkdir test1''' and Press '''Enter'''.

While recording, show the directory creation in the home directory.

Place the terminal and home directory side-by-side.
|| Let us now learn to create directories.

To create a directory I will type '''mkdir space test1 '''and press '''Enter.'''

If no output appears it means that the command has executed successfully.
|-
|| Type '''mkdir test2 test3 '''and press '''Enter'''
|| Let us now create multiple directories.

So I will type '''mkdir space test2 space test3 '''and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Type '''mkdir -p test4/test4.1''' and press '''Enter.'''

Show the folders '''test4 and test4.1'''

Highlight '''-p'''.
|| Now to show the directory hierarchy let me type '''mkdir space hyphen p space test4 slash test4 point 1''' and press '''Enter'''.

This will create a directory''' test4 point 1 '''within the '''test4 directory.'''

Here the argument '''hyphen p '''creates parent '''directories '''if they do not already exist.

Then''' test4 point 1 directory '''is created inside '''test4'''.
|-
||
|| Now let us learn to move into various directories.
|-
|| Type:''' cd test1 '''press '''Enter'''.
|| Type '''cd space test1''' and press''' Enter'''.

We are now in the '''test1''' directory.
|-
|| Type '''cd .. ''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Let us go back to the parent directory.

So type '''cd space dot dot'''
|-
|| Type: '''cd test''' press Tab keys twice .

Press the backspace key to erase the prompt.
|| Now type '''cd test''' and press the '''Tab''' key twice.

All the directories with the name test will be displayed.

Press the backspace key to erase the prompt.
|-
|| Type '''cd test4/test4.1 '''and''' press Enter.'''
|| Type''' cd test4/test4 point 1 '''and press '''Enter '''to move to''' test4 point 1'''.
|-
|| '''Type: cd ../../'''

Press the''' Enter '''key.
|| Now let us learn to do multi-level navigation to come back to the home directory.

Let me type '''cd space dot dot slash dot dot slash'''

Press the '''Enter''' key.

Here the first two dots move up one level.

Second two dots moves up one more directory level.

Press the '''Enter''' key.
|-
|| Type: '''rmdir test1''' and press '''Enter.'''
|| Now we will learn to delete the created test 1 directory.

Type '''rmdir space test1''' and press '''Enter.'''

Now, we can see that the test1 directory is removed.
|-
|| Type: '''rmdir test4 test4/test4.1'''

'''Highlight the output: rmdir: failed to remove 'test4': Directory not empty'''
|| Type '''rmdir space test4 space test4 slash test4 point 1'''.

The output shows

'''rmdir: failed to remove 'test4': Directory not empty'''.

This indicates that if the directory is not empty it cannot be deleted.

A directory must be empty before it can be removed using''' rmdir'''.
|-
||
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial we have learn to:
* Define Files, directories and inode
* Create a file and add text in it
* Create directories and
* Change and remove directories safely
|| Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Assignment'''
* Create a file named '''myfile''' using the cat command
* Write one line of text in it.
* Display the contents of '''myfile''' using the cat command.
* Create a directory named '''mydir''' and create sub-directories inside it.
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/General-Purpose-Utilities/English

2026-01-05T14:49:58Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: General Purpose Utilities''' '''Author: EduPyramids Team''' '''Keywords: '''echo, uname, who, passwd, root, Linux utilities, video tutorial. {|borde..."

'''Title of the Script: General Purpose Utilities'''

'''Author: EduPyramids Team'''

'''Keywords: '''echo, uname, who, passwd, root, Linux utilities, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this''' Spoken tutorial '''on''' General Purpose Utilities '''in''' Linux.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2 '''

'''Learning Objective'''
|| In this tutorial we will learn to;
* Use the echo command with escape sequences
* Check the Linux kernel version in the system
* View current and logged-in users and
* Change the login password.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using,

Ubuntu OS version 24 point zero 4
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should be familiar with the basic Linux terminal commands.

For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial

1. gpu-commands.txt

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| Screencast:

Press''' Ctrl, Alt '''and''' T keys '''on your''' keyboard'''
|| Press''' Ctrl''', '''Alt '''and''' T keys '''on your''' keyboard''' to open the''' terminal'''.
|-
|| Type: '''echo Hello from EduPyramids'''
|| Let us begin with the echo command.

Type '''echo space Hello space from space EduPyramids''' and press Enter.echo '''command''' in Linux is used to '''display text or output to the terminal'''.

The message '''Hello from EduPyramids '''is displayed as output.
|-
|| Type: '''echo -e 'Enter a command\c''''and press Enter.

Type '''clear''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Type echo hyphen e space 'Enter a command backslash c' and press Enter.

The -e option allows echo to interpret escape sequences Here, \c prevents the cursor from moving to a new line.

As a result, the prompt '''Enter a command''' is displayed, and the cursor remains on the same line.

This is useful when we want the user to enter input on the same line.

Let’s clear the screen.
|-
|| Type: '''echo -e 'Hello World\n'''' press Enter.
|| Now lets try the backslash''' t''' and backslash '''n '''using Hello world as an example.

Type: '''echo hyphen e 'Hello World backslash n'''' and press Enter.

The backslash''' n''' moves the cursor to a new line. As a result, the prompt appears on the next line after the output.
|-
|| type: '''echo -e 'Hello\nWorld'''' press Enter
|| Now type: '''echo hyphen e 'Hello backslash n World'''' and press Enter This command prints Hello and World on two separate lines, one below the other.
|-
|| Type: '''echo -e 'Hello\tWorld' '''press Enter.
|| Type: '''echo hyphen e 'Hello backslash t World' '''press Enter.This command prints Hello and World with a tab space between them.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''uname -r'''

Type: clear and press Enter
|| To check the Linux kernel version, type '''uname''' '''space''' '''hyphen r '''and press Enter.

The output shows the kernel release version currently running on the system.Clear the screen.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''whoami'''
|| To know what your username is, without spaces, type''' whoami '''and '''Press Enter.'''
|-
|| Type: '''who''' and Press Enter.
|| To see the list of users currently logged into the system, type '''who''' and press Enter.

The output shows all users who are currently logged in

It displays information such as the username, terminal (seat), display, and login time for each session.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''passwd''' and press Enter.

Point to the output.
|| To change our login password when needed.Type: '''passwd''' and press '''Enter'''”
|-
|| Changing password for username

Current password.

Type the current password

type the new password

Retype the new password to confirm.
|| Type your current system password when prompted.

Next, type the new password and then retype it to confirm.

If the current password is forgotten, it can still be changed.

The root user, who has administrative privileges, can perform this action.

We will learn about root privileges in the upcoming tutorials.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial we have learnt to
* Use the echo command with escape sequences
* Check the Linux kernel version in the system
* View current and logged-in users
* Change the login password
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''

As an assignment, please do the following.
* Display “Welcome to Linux” using '''\c, \t, '''and''' \n '''commands.
* Restart the system and note login details using '''who '''command
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Structure-of-Linux-Commands/English

2026-01-03T19:22:39Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script: Structure of Commands''' '''Author: EduPyramids Team.''' '''Keywords: '''command structure, command name, options, arguments, ls command, man, apropo..."

'''Title of the script: Structure of Commands'''

'''Author: EduPyramids Team.'''

'''Keywords: '''command structure, command name, options, arguments, ls command, man, apropos, whatis, man -k, ls --help, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue '''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the '''Spoken tutorial''' on''' Structure of Linux Commands'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''

In this tutorial, we will learn about:
* Structure of Linux commands
* Command name, options, and arguments
* Using help commands like man, apropos, and - -help
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:
* Structure of Linux commands
* Command name, options, and arguments
* Using help commands like man, apropos, and hyphen hyphen help.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using,

Ubuntu OS version 24 point 04.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,

Learners should know basic Linux terminal commands.

For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial

1. sc-commands.txt

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us get started with the structure of Linux commands.
|-
|| Screencast:

Press''' Ctrl, Alt '''and''' T keys '''on your''' keyboard'''
|| Open the terminal by pressing '''Ctrl, Alt, and T''' keys together.
|-
|| '''Type: ls'''

'''press Enter'''

Highlight all the files shown in the terminal.
|| Type: '''ls'''.

'''ls''' command lists files and folders in a directory.

Commands may be single words or multiple words separated by spaces.

Press '''Enter'''.

Here we can see all the files and folders in the '''Home''' directory.
|-
|| '''Type: clear '''

press '''Enter'''.
|| Type '''clear''' to clear the terminal window.

The '''clear''' command removes previous output from the terminal.

press '''Enter'''.

It gives a clean screen, making the terminal easier to read and work with.
|-
|| '''Type''': '''ls -a'''
|| Type''' ls space hyphen a'''.

The '''ls space hyphen a''' command lists all files and directories.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Structure of Linux Commands.'''
* A Linux command consists of multiple parts.
* The first part is the '''command name'''; the remaining parts are called arguments.
* Arguments can be '''options''', '''expressions''', or '''file names'''.
* A command can perform different tasks depending on the '''option''' specified.
* Options usually begin with a single(-) hyphen or a double(- -) hyphen sign.
||
* A Linux command consists of multiple parts.
* The first part is the '''command name'''; the remaining parts are called arguments.
* Arguments can be '''options''', '''expressions''', or '''file names'''.
* A command can perform different tasks depending on the '''option''' specified.
* Options usually begin with a single hyphen or a double hyphen sign.
|-
|| Press enter

Highlight all the files shown in the terminal.
|| Let me press Enter.

Here we can see all the files in the Home directory.
|-
|| Type: '''clear''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Type '''clear''' and press Enter to clear the terminal window.
|-
|| Type: '''ls --all'''

'''Highlight the list of directories.'''
|| Now type '''ls space hyphen hyphen all '''and press '''Enter'''.

'''ls space hyphen hyphen all'''

lists all files and directories, and also hidden files that start with a dot.
|-
|| Type: '''clear''' and press '''Enter'''.

Type:''' ls -d '''and press '''Enter'''.
|| Again, type clear to clear the terminal .

Now type '''ls space hyphen d '''and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| '''Highlight the output: dot(.)'''

'''highlight -d'''
|| Notice that only a single dot appears as '''output.'''

The dot represents the '''current directory'''.

The '''hyphen d''' option tells '''Linux, '''show the '''directory''' itself, not what’s inside it.

Since we didn’t give a''' directory '''name, '''Linux '''shows the current '''directory''' as dot.
|-
|| Type:''' ls -d ALL''' and press '''Enter'''.

Highlight '''ALL'''
|| Now, let’s try something different. Suppose we have a '''directory''' named '''ALL'''.

Type:''' ls space hyphen d space ALL''' and press '''Enter'''.

We can see in the '''output,''' Linux prints '''ALL'''.

It only shows the name of the directory.

It does not list the files or folders inside '''ALL'''.
|-
|| Only Narration.
|| In '''Linux''' we have a large number of commands.

Each command has many different options.

So how do we keep track of it?

In reality we don't have to.

This is because of the excellent online help facilities available in Linux.

The '''man''' command displays the manual pages for Linux commands.
|-
|| Type '''man''' '''ls''' and press Enter.

Scroll up to show all the arguments

Press '''q'''
|| To learn more about the ls command,

type '''man''' '''space''' '''ls''' and press Enter.

'''man '''is the system’s manual pager that displays documentation for commands.

Arguments given to '''man''' are normally the name of a program, utility or function.

Press '''q''' to exit the manual.
|-
||
|| '''man''' command provides the '''hyphen''' '''k''' option.

It takes a keyword and returns a list of commands and their brief purpose.
|-
|| Type at the command prompt

'''man -k directories'''
|| For example, to create a directory, we may not know the exact command.

So we can type '''man space hyphen k space directories '''and press Enter.
|-
|| Scroll down to show all the commands related to directories.
|| Now we can search each of these commands to see what we actually need.
|-
|| Type at the command prompt: '''apropos directories'''
|| We can do the same search using the '''apropos''' command.

I have opened another terminal window.

Type '''apropos''' '''space''' '''directories''' and press Enter, to see the same output.
|-
|| Scroll up to show all the commands related to directories.

Close the second terminal window.

Type '''clear''' and press '''Enter'''
|| The '''apropos''' command works similarly to '''man -k.'''

Both search for commands related to a keyword.

I will close the second terminal window.

Clear the screen.
|-
|| Type '''whatis''' and press '''Enter'''.

Highlight the output

Type '''man -f''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Type '''whatis''' and press '''Enter'''.

The output displays '''whatis''' '''space''' '''what''' '''question''' '''mark'''.

The '''whatis''' command gives a one-line description of a command.

Type '''man''' '''space''' '''hyphen''' '''f''' and press '''Enter'''.

Both give one line description about the command.
|-
|| Type at the command prompt''' '''

'''whatis ls'''
|| Type '''whatis space ls '''and press Enter to see the output.
|-
||
|| To know more options available for a command we can use the '''hyphen hyphen help''' option.
|-
|| '''Type: ls --help'''

Scroll up to show all the options available
|| Type '''ls space''' '''hyphen hyphen help''' and press '''Enter'''.

Many commands also support the hyphen hyphen option.

It displays a brief list of options directly on the terminal.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we learnt about:
* Structure of Linux commands
* Command name, options, and arguments
* Using help commands like man, apropos, and - - help
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Assignment'''

'''As an Assignment,'''

'''Run the following commands and check the output:'''
* '''ls -alh'''
* '''ls -al'''
* '''ls -s'''
|| As an Assignment, please do the following
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids educational services private limited SINE IIT Bombay. Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Date-and-Time-Commands/English

2026-01-03T16:47:39Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title of the script: Date and Time commands'''

'''Authors: EduPyramids Team'''

'''Keywords: date, cal, ncal, Linux, time, calendar, sudo, man, video tutorial.'''

{| border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue '''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the '''Spoken tutorial''' on''' Date and Time Commands '''in '''Linux. '''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial we will learn to,
* Use Linux commands to display the system date and time
* Use date command options
* Install '''ncal package'''
* View calendars using '''cal '''command
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using

Ubuntu OS version 24.04 and

A working''' internet''' connection.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,

Learners should know the basics of using the Linux terminal.

For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial

1. dc-commands.txt

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| Screencast:

Press''' Ctrl, Alt '''and''' T keys '''on your''' keyboard'''
|| Open the terminal by pressing '''Ctrl''', '''Alt''', and '''T''' keys.
|-
||
|| Let us check the current system date and time.

For this, we use the '''date''' command with arguments.
|-
|| Type '''date '''press''' Enter'''
|| To view the current system date and time,

type '''date''' command and press '''Enter'''.

It will display the day, date, month, year, time and time zone.
|-
|| Point to the output.
|| The '''date''' command is very versatile and offers many options.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''date +%T'''
|| Type at the prompt

'''date space plus percent capital T '''press''' Enter'''.
|-
|| Point to the output.

hh:mm:ss format.
|| Time in hours, minutes and seconds format is displayed.
|-
||
|| Let us see a few more examples using the '''date''' command.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''date +%h''' press Enter.

Point to the output.
|| Type''' date space plus percent h '''and press '''Enter'''.

The name of the month is displayed.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''date +%m '''
|| Similarly, type

'''date space plus percent m'''

It shows month of the current year.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''date +%y'''
|| Now type '''date space plus percent y''' it shows the last two digits of the current year.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''date +%h%y'''
|| We can combine these options as well.

Type '''date space plus percent h percent y''' and press '''Enter.'''

The output shows Jan twenty six.
|-
|| Type '''man date''' Press Enter.

Scroll up to see the commands.

Press '''q'''
|| Let us learn more about the '''date''' command and its options.

Type''' man space date''' and press '''Enter'''.

This opens the manual page for the date command.

Press '''q''' to exit the manual.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''cal '''
|| Another related command is the '''cal''' command.

Though less commonly used, it displays the calendar of the current month.

Type '''cal''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| '''Command 'cal' not found, but can be installed with: sudo apt install ncal'''
|| In some Ubuntu systems, the '''cal''' command is part of the ncal package.

If the '''cal''' command is not found, we need to install '''ncal.'''

The '''ncal package''' is used to display calendars on the terminal in Linux systems.
|-
|| Type:''' sudo apt install ncal'''
|| Let us install '''ncal'''.

Type the command '''sudo apt install ncal'''

and press '''Enter'''.

If prompted enter the system password and press '''Enter'''.

Installation may take some time.
|-
|| Type: '''cal''' press Enter
|| Now type '''cal''' and press '''Enter'''.

Here it displays the calendar for the current month and year.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''cal 12 2070'''
|| Similarly if we want the calendar for a specific month, say for '''December 2070'''.

Then we will type '''cal 12 2070.'''
|-
|| Show the output.
|| This gives the calendar of '''December 2070'''.
|-
|| Only Narration

man date
|| Users can explore the options in the''' date''' command using the '''man date''' command.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial we have learnt to:
* Use Linux commands to display the system date and time
* Use date command options
* Install '''ncal package'''
* View calendars using '''cal '''command
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''

As an assignment,

Open the terminal: Ctrl+Alt+T keys.
* Type date +%R, press Enter.
* Type date +%U, press Enter.
* Type date +%j, press Enter.
* Type date +%q, press Enter.
* Type cal 06 2035, press Enter.
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by '''EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited, SINE, IIT Bombay.'''Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Date-and-Time-Commands/English

2026-01-03T16:46:19Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script: Date and Time commands.''' '''Authors: EduPyramids Team''' '''Keywords: date, cal, ncal, Linux, time, calendar, sudo, man, video tutorial.''' {| bor..."

'''Title of the script: Date and Time commands.'''

'''Authors: EduPyramids Team'''

'''Keywords: date, cal, ncal, Linux, time, calendar, sudo, man, video tutorial.'''

{| border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue '''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the '''Spoken tutorial''' on''' Date and Time Commands '''in '''Linux. '''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial we will learn to,
* Use Linux commands to display the system date and time
* Use date command options
* Install '''ncal package'''
* View calendars using '''cal '''command
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using

Ubuntu OS version 24.04 and

A working''' internet''' connection.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,

Learners should know the basics of using the Linux terminal.

For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial

1. dc-commands.txt

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| Screencast:

Press''' Ctrl, Alt '''and''' T keys '''on your''' keyboard'''
|| Open the terminal by pressing '''Ctrl''', '''Alt''', and '''T''' keys.
|-
||
|| Let us check the current system date and time.

For this, we use the '''date''' command with arguments.
|-
|| Type '''date '''press''' Enter'''
|| To view the current system date and time,

type '''date''' command and press '''Enter'''.

It will display the day, date, month, year, time and time zone.
|-
|| Point to the output.
|| The '''date''' command is very versatile and offers many options.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''date +%T'''
|| Type at the prompt

'''date space plus percent capital T '''press''' Enter'''.
|-
|| Point to the output.

hh:mm:ss format.
|| Time in hours, minutes and seconds format is displayed.
|-
||
|| Let us see a few more examples using the '''date''' command.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''date +%h''' press Enter.

Point to the output.
|| Type''' date space plus percent h '''and press '''Enter'''.

The name of the month is displayed.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''date +%m '''
|| Similarly, type

'''date space plus percent m'''

It shows month of the current year.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''date +%y'''
|| Now type '''date space plus percent y''' it shows the last two digits of the current year.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''date +%h%y'''
|| We can combine these options as well.

Type '''date space plus percent h percent y''' and press '''Enter.'''

The output shows Jan twenty six.
|-
|| Type '''man date''' Press Enter.

Scroll up to see the commands.

Press '''q'''
|| Let us learn more about the '''date''' command and its options.

Type''' man space date''' and press '''Enter'''.

This opens the manual page for the date command.

Press '''q''' to exit the manual.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''cal '''
|| Another related command is the '''cal''' command.

Though less commonly used, it displays the calendar of the current month.

Type '''cal''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| '''Command 'cal' not found, but can be installed with: sudo apt install ncal'''
|| In some Ubuntu systems, the '''cal''' command is part of the ncal package.

If the '''cal''' command is not found, we need to install '''ncal.'''

The '''ncal package''' is used to display calendars on the terminal in Linux systems.
|-
|| Type:''' sudo apt install ncal'''
|| Let us install '''ncal'''.

Type the command '''sudo apt install ncal'''

and press '''Enter'''.

If prompted enter the system password and press '''Enter'''.

Installation may take some time.
|-
|| Type: '''cal''' press Enter
|| Now type '''cal''' and press '''Enter'''.

Here it displays the calendar for the current month and year.
|-
|| Type at the prompt

'''cal 12 2070'''
|| Similarly if we want the calendar for a specific month, say for '''December 2070'''.

Then we will type '''cal 12 2070.'''
|-
|| Show the output.
|| This gives the calendar of '''December 2070'''.
|-
|| Only Narration

man date
|| Users can explore the options in the''' date''' command using the '''man date''' command.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial we have learnt to:
* Use Linux commands to display the system date and time
* Use date command options
* Install '''ncal package'''
* View calendars using '''cal '''command
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''

As an assignment,

Open the terminal: Ctrl+Alt+T keys.
* Type date +%R, press Enter.
* Type date +%U, press Enter.
* Type date +%j, press Enter.
* Type date +%q, press Enter.
* Type cal 06 2035, press Enter.
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by '''EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited, SINE, IIT Bombay.'''Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Basic-Commands/English

2026-01-03T13:45:17Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script: Basic Commands''' '''Author: EduPyramids Team''' '''Keywords: linux commands, shell, command interpreter, internal commands, external commands , bash..."

'''Title of the script: Basic Commands'''

'''Author: EduPyramids Team'''

'''Keywords: linux commands, shell, command interpreter, internal commands, external commands , bash, type, path, video tutorial.'''

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue '''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken tutorial on''' Basic Commands''' in Linux.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:
* Linux commands and a command interpreter.
* Identifying internal and external commands in Linux.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using
* Ubuntu OS version 24 point zero 4
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,
* Learners should have Ubuntu version 24 point zero 4
* For the prerequisite Linux tutorials please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial

1. bc-commands.txt

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Linux Commands'''
|| Now let us see what '''Linux''' '''commands''' are?
* Linux commands are words used to execute tasks.
* Most commands are short, usually no more than four characters '''(e.g. ls, who, ps).'''
* Commands are written in lowercase and are case-sensitive.
|-
|| Screencast:

Press''' Ctrl, Alt '''and''' T keys '''on your''' keyboard'''
|| Let us open the terminal by pressing '''Ctrl, Alt, '''and '''T '''keys on the keyboard.
|-
|| Point to the''' $ prompt '''on the '''terminal '''window.
|| we can see a prompt ($) and a cursor blinking next to it.

This is where we need to type in a command.
|-
|| Type at the command prompt:

'''who >> '''press Enter
|| Type at the prompt '''who''' and press Enter.

We can see the name of the users logged in on the terminal.
|-
|| Only Narration
|| Do you know which entity converts these commands into actual actions?

This job is done by the Command Interpreter called the '''shell'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Shell Program'''
||
* A '''shell''' is a program that acts as an interface between the user and Linux.
* It allows us to enter commands for the operating system to execute.
* Linux supports multiple shells, and users can choose their preferred one.
* The default shell on most Linux systems, including Ubuntu, is bash.
* Its executable file is located at / bin/bash.
* Bash stands for GNU Bourne-Again Shell and it is part of the GNU suite of tools.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Shell Program'''
* Bash is the most popular shell, available on almost all Linux systems.
* Other shells include Bourne shell (sh), C Shell (csh) and Korn shell(ksh)
||
* Bash is the most popular shell, available on almost all Linux systems.
* Other shells include Bourne shell , C Shell and Korn shell.
|-
|| Type at the command prompt

'''echo $SHELL'''
|| Let us see which shell we are using?

Type '''echo space dollar SHELL '''in capitals and press Enter.
|-
|| Point to /bin/bash
|| The output shows '''slash bin slash bash'''( '''/bin/bash)'''

The output shows the''' '''present shell that is being used.
|-
|| '''Type at $: type ps'''

'''Highlight the output: ps is /usr/bin/ps'''
|| Now type: '''type space ps '''and press Enter.

The output is shown as''' ps is /usr/bin/ps'''

This shows that '''ps''' is a file stored in the '''usr/bin '''directory.
|-
|| Point to the''' type ps '''command.
|| When a command is entered, the shell searches listed directories for it. If found, the program runs; otherwise, a “command not found” error appears.
|-
|| Type '''echo $PATH'''
|| To see the lists of the directories stored in the PATH environment variable,

type '''echo space dollar''' '''PATH '''in capital.

Press Enter.
|-
||
|| Based on how commands are executed, Linux commands are classified into two types:

internal commands and external commands.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''External Commands'''
||
* External commands are separate executable files located in the system directories.
* For example '''slash bin (/bin)''',''' slash u s r slash bin (/usr, or slash s bin. '''
* When we run a command, the shell searches through the dollar PATH ($PATH) variable to find the file.
* Then starts a new "child process" to run it.
* These are independent programs.
* We can update them or install new ones (like''' git''' or '''python''') without changing the '''shell'''.
* They take slightly more time and memory to launch.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Internal Commands'''
||
* Internal commands are part of the '''shell''''s source code like '''bash'''.
* When we type an internal command, the shell executes it directly.
* They are very fast because no new process needs to be started.
* They often handle shell-specific tasks like changing directories or managing the environment.
|-
|| Type at the prompt: '''type''' '''echo'''

Press Enter.
|| Type at the prompt, '''type '''space''' echo''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Point to the output.
|| The output shows '''echo is a shell builtin.'''

It means '''echo''' command is an internal command.
|-
|| Point to the output.

Type: '''type cd'''
|| Type, '''type '''space''' cd''' and press Enter.

The output shows '''cd is a shell builtin.'''

So''' cd '''is also an internal command.
|-
||
|| We will learn more about commands in the upcoming tutorials.
|-
|| '''Slide 11'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt about:
* Linux commands and a command interpreter.
* Identifying internal and external commands in Linux
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 12'''

'''Assignment'''

As an assignment,

Run the following commands and check the output
* '''type exit'''
* '''ls '''
* '''type cp'''
|| As an Assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 13'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids educational services private limited SINE IIT Bombay. Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Synaptic-Package-Manager/English

2026-01-03T11:41:09Z

Ketkinaina:

'''TITLE: Synaptic Package Manager '''

'''Authors:''' EduPyramids Team

'''Keywords:''' Ubuntu Linux, synaptic package manager, vlc media player, icons, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue '''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Synaptic Package Manager in Linux.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

''' Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Understand what '''Synaptic Package Manager '''is and install it using the terminal
* Configure '''Synaptic Package Manager'''
* Install an application using '''Synaptic Package Manager'''
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using:

'''Ubuntu OS '''version 24.04 and

A working '''internet''' connection.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

''' Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,

learners should be familiar with basic Linux operations.

learners should have Ubuntu version 24.04 installed.

For the prerequisite '''Linux tutorials '''please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5Synaptic Package Manager '''
|| '''Synaptic Package Manager''' is a graphical front-end for APT(Advanced Package Tool.)

It provides a GUI for package management instead of '''apt-get''' command line.
|-
|| Press '''Ctrl, Alt '''and''' T Keys'''

'''Type: sudo apt update '''and press''' enter'''

'''Type: sudo apt install synaptic '''and press '''Enter key.'''
|| By default, '''Synaptic Package Manager''' is not pre-installed in the system.

Let us install it using the Terminal.Open the '''Terminal. '''

First let’s update the''' local package index'''.

Type '''sudo apt update''' and press Enter.

If prompted, enter the admin password and press Enter.

Type '''sudo apt install synaptic '''and press Enter.
|-
|| Highlight the information on the terminal

'''Type y'''
|| '''Terminal '''displays list of '''packages '''to be installed and more information.

It asks '''Do you want to continue?'''

Type''' y '''and press '''Enter''' to continue.
|-
|| Show the installation process on the terminal.

Packages getting downloaded.

Success message on the terminal

Click on X icon.
|| The installation begins now.

It may take some time to finish.

Now we have successfully installed '''Synaptic Package Manager'''.

Let us close the '''terminal'''.
|-
|| Highlight output.Click Show AppsEnter password
|| Click '''Show Apps''' and search for '''Synaptic Package'''.

Click to open it and enter the '''admin password''' when prompted.

Click on '''Authenticate''' button
|-
|| Cursor on '''Synaptic Package Manager '''
|| '''Synaptic Package Manager '''window opens.

Now let us configure '''Proxy''' and '''Repository'''.We have to do this before installing an '''application''' or '''package'''.
|-
|| Click on Settings Click '''Preferences'''Cursor on '''Preferences'''Click on '''Network'''
|| From the top '''menu, click '''on '''Settings''' and select '''Preferences'''.'''Preferences '''window opens.

Click on the '''Network Tab''' to configure the''' proxy '''settings.
|-
|| Click '''Direct connection to the Internet.Click ApplyClick OK'''
|| From the '''Proxy Server '''options choose '''Direct connection to the Internet'''.'''Click '''the '''Apply '''button at bottom right corner.

Click '''OK '''to close the '''Preferences '''window.
|-
|| Click Settings and select RepositoriesClick on '''Download fromClick Server for India'''Click the '''Close '''button.
|| Again, click on '''Settings '''and select '''Repositories'''.The '''Software and Updates '''window opens.Click on the '''Download from '''dropdown.

The '''Server for India''' option is selected by default, keep it as it is.This dropdown shows a list of''' Servers '''across the globe.

Click the '''Close '''button.
|-
|| At the top left corner, click on '''Reload '''button.
|| If using '''Synaptic Package Manager '''for the first time, reload the packages.

At the top left corner, click on '''Reload '''button.

We see packages transferring over the internet and updating in real time.
|-
|| Type VLCClick Search buttonShow packages

To select the VLC''' package''', right click on the check box.
|| We will now install '''VLC''' '''Media''' '''Player''' as an example application.

In the '''Search '''window, type '''VLC '''and '''click '''on the '''Search''' button.All the '''VLC '''packages to be downloaded will be listed.

To select the relevant '''VLC package''', right click on the check box.
|-
|| From the menu select Mark for Installation.Synaptic pop-up appears.

Click on the '''Mark '''button.Click on the '''Apply''' button on the toolbar.
|| From the menu select '''Mark for Installation'''.Synaptic pop-up appears, to allow all dependencies to click on the '''Mark '''button.Click on the '''Apply''' button on the '''toolbar'''.
|-
|| Cursor on the window.

Click on the '''Apply''' button.

Point to the '''Applying Changes '''window.

Click on the Close button.
|| A '''Summary''' window appears, showing the details of the '''packages''' to be installed.

Click on the '''Apply''' button at the bottom.

It may take some time to install the packages.

The''' Applying Changes '''window will be closed as soon as the installation gets complete.Click on the '''Close''' button.
|-
||
|| Go to '''Show Apps''', in the '''search bar,''' Type: '''VLC '''media player and click the icon.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* Understand what''' Synaptic Package Manager '''is and install it using the terminal
* Configure '''Synaptic Package Manager'''
* Install an application using '''Synaptic Package Manager'''
|| With this we come to the end of this '''tutorial.''' Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''

'''As an Assignment,'''
* Install the gedit and Audacity using Synaptic Package Manager
|| As an Assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This '''Spoken Tutorial''' is brought to you by '''EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.''' Thank you.
|-
|}

Linux-New/C2/Synaptic-Package-Manager/English

2026-01-03T11:35:03Z

Ketkinaina:

'''TITLE: Synaptic Package Manager '''

'''Authors:''' EduPyramids Team

'''Keywords:''' Ubuntu Linux, synaptic package manager, vlc media player, icons, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue '''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Synaptic Package Manager in Linux.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

''' Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Understand what '''Synaptic Package Manager '''is and install it using the terminal
* Configure '''Synaptic Package Manager'''
* Install an application using '''Synaptic Package Manager'''
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using:

'''Ubuntu OS '''version 24.04 and

A working '''internet''' connection.
|-
|| '''Slide 4 Pre-requisites'''

[https://edupyramids.org/ https://EduPyramids.org]
|| To follow this tutorial,

learners should be familiar with basic Linux operations.

learners should have Ubuntu version 24.04 installed.

For the prerequisite '''Linux tutorials '''please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide 5Synaptic Package Manager '''
|| '''Synaptic Package Manager''' is a graphical front-end for APT(Advanced Package Tool.)

It provides a GUI for package management instead of '''apt-get''' command line.
|-
|| Press '''Ctrl, Alt '''and''' T Keys'''

'''Type: sudo apt update '''and press''' enter'''

'''Type: sudo apt install synaptic '''and press '''Enter key.'''
|| By default, '''Synaptic Package Manager''' is not pre-installed in the system.

Let us install it using the Terminal.Open the '''Terminal. '''

First let’s update the''' local package index'''.

Type '''sudo apt update''' and press Enter.

If prompted, enter the admin password and press Enter.

Type '''sudo apt install synaptic '''and press Enter.
|-
|| Highlight the information on the terminal

'''Type y'''
|| '''Terminal '''displays list of '''packages '''to be installed and more information.

It asks '''Do you want to continue?'''

Type''' y '''and press '''Enter''' to continue.
|-
|| Show the installation process on the terminal.

Packages getting downloaded.

Success message on the terminal

Click on X icon.
|| The installation begins now.

It may take some time to finish.

Now we have successfully installed '''Synaptic Package Manager'''.

Let us close the '''terminal'''.
|-
|| Highlight output.Click Show AppsEnter password
|| Click '''Show Apps''' and search for '''Synaptic Package'''.

Click to open it and enter the '''admin password''' when prompted.

Click on '''Authenticate''' button
|-
|| Cursor on '''Synaptic Package Manager '''
|| '''Synaptic Package Manager '''window opens.

Now let us configure '''Proxy''' and '''Repository'''.We have to do this before installing an '''application''' or '''package'''.
|-
|| Click on Settings Click '''Preferences'''Cursor on '''Preferences'''Click on '''Network'''
|| From the top '''menu, click '''on '''Settings''' and select '''Preferences'''.'''Preferences '''window opens.

Click on the '''Network Tab''' to configure the''' proxy '''settings.
|-
|| Click '''Direct connection to the Internet.Click ApplyClick OK'''
|| From the '''Proxy Server '''options choose '''Direct connection to the Internet'''.'''Click '''the '''Apply '''button at bottom right corner.

Click '''OK '''to close the '''Preferences '''window.
|-
|| Click Settings and select RepositoriesClick on '''Download fromClick Server for India'''Click the '''Close '''button.
|| Again, click on '''Settings '''and select '''Repositories'''.The '''Software and Updates '''window opens.Click on the '''Download from '''dropdown.

The '''Server for India''' option is selected by default, keep it as it is.This dropdown shows a list of''' Servers '''across the globe.

Click the '''Close '''button.
|-
|| At the top left corner, click on '''Reload '''button.
|| If using '''Synaptic Package Manager '''for the first time, reload the packages.

At the top left corner, click on '''Reload '''button.

We see packages transferring over the internet and updating in real time.
|-
|| Type VLCClick Search buttonShow packages

To select the VLC''' package''', right click on the check box.
|| We will now install '''VLC''' '''Media''' '''Player''' as an example application.

In the '''Search '''window, type '''VLC '''and '''click '''on the '''Search''' button.All the '''VLC '''packages to be downloaded will be listed.

To select the relevant '''VLC package''', right click on the check box.
|-
|| From the menu select Mark for Installation.Synaptic pop-up appears.

Click on the '''Mark '''button.Click on the '''Apply''' button on the toolbar.
|| From the menu select '''Mark for Installation'''.Synaptic pop-up appears, to allow all dependencies to click on the '''Mark '''button.Click on the '''Apply''' button on the '''toolbar'''.
|-
|| Cursor on the window.

Click on the '''Apply''' button.

Point to the '''Applying Changes '''window.

Click on the Close button.
|| A '''Summary''' window appears, showing the details of the '''packages''' to be installed.

Click on the '''Apply''' button at the bottom.

It may take some time to install the packages.

The''' Applying Changes '''window will be closed as soon as the installation gets complete.Click on the '''Close''' button.
|-
||
|| Go to '''Show Apps''', in the '''search bar,''' Type: '''VLC '''media player and click the icon.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* Understand what''' Synaptic Package Manager '''is and install it using the terminal
* Configure '''Synaptic Package Manager'''
* Install an application using '''Synaptic Package Manager'''
|| With this we come to the end of this '''tutorial.''' Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''As an Assignment,'''
* Install the gedit and Audacity using Synaptic Package Manager
|| As an Assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This '''Spoken Tutorial''' is brought to you by '''EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited SINE IIT Bombay.''' Thank you.
|-
|}

FreeCAD/C3/Working-with-STL-Files-in-FreeCAD/English

2025-12-01T06:57:55Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title of the script: Working with STL Files in FreeCAD.'''

'''Author: Jakub Michalski.'''

'''Keywords: FreeCAD, STL, mesh, shape, solid, pocket, 3D modeling, video tutorial.'''

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Working with STL Files''' in '''FreeCAD'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Export a FreeCAD model to STL format.
* Import an STL file into FreeCAD.
* Convert an STL mesh into a solid.
* Refine the solid and make modifications.
|-
|| '''Slide 3 '''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using:
* '''Windows 11'''
* '''FreeCAD version 1.0.0'''
|-
|| '''Slide 4 '''

'''Prerequisite'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should know the basics of the '''FreeCAD''' interface and navigation.
|-
|| Click '''Help''' menu

In the drop down click '''Start'''.
|| Let’s open FreeCAD.

Go to the '''Help''' menu.

In the drop down click '''Start''' option.
|-
|| In the start menu, scroll down.

Under examples, select the PartDesignExample.FCStd file.
|| Scroll down to see the examples.

Under examples select the '''PartDesignExample.FCStd '''file.

'''PartDesignExample''' model loads in a new file.
|-
|| Select the body in the model tree.

Select file and click export.
|| Now let us export the '''FreeCAD''' file into '''STL '''format.

Select the '''Body''' in the '''Model''' tree. Go to '''File '''and select '''Export''' or press''' Ctrl + E.'''
|-
|| Select the Save as type as STL Mesh (*.stl * .ast) format.

Type the File name as Example.stl and click Save.
|| Export File dialog box opens.

In the dialog box, select the '''Save as type''' as '''STL Mesh '''format.

Type the File name as '''Example''' and click '''Save'''.

Users can save the file with some other name as well. This exports the part as an STL mesh file.
|-
|| Select file and click new.
|| Now, let’s create a new file.Go to '''File''' click '''New'''
|-
|| Select file and click import.

Set the file type to '''STL''' Mesh '''(*.stl *.STL *.ast *.AST)'''

Select the '''Example.stl''' file. Click '''Open'''.
|| In the new file, go to '''File''' and select '''Import'''.

Set the file type to '''STL Mesh.'''

Select the''' Example.stl''' file and click '''Open'''
|-
|| STL Model in 3D view
|| The model is imported into the workspace.
|-
|| Select the dropdown next to Draw style.

Select Flat lines option.
|| By default the draw style is set to '''Shaded'''.

Select the dropdown next to''' Draw style''' and select''' Flat lines''' option.This helps to clearly see the triangular meshes.
|-
|| Switch to '''Part''' '''Workbench'''
|| Switch to the '''Part Workbench'''.
|-
|| In the model tree select the model mesh.Go to the '''Part''' menu.

Click '''Create shape from mesh''' option.
|| In the model tree select the model mesh.Go to the '''Part''' menu and click '''Create shape from mesh''' option.
|-
|| Point to the pop window

Click OK.
|| '''Shape From Mesh''' pop up window opens.

Let’s leave the settings as default and click '''OK.'''
|-
|| Show the model tree.

Click the eye icon to hide the mesh.
|| A new '''Shape''' object is created in the tree.Hide the old '''Mesh''' object by clicking on its eye icon.
|-
|| Show in the model.
|| This shape now allows selection of faces, edges, and vertices.We can use it for measurements or further modeling.
|-
|| Select the shape object from the model tree.

Select part. Click Convert to solid.
|| To create a solid, select the shape object .

Go to the''' Part''' menu and click''' Convert to solid'''.
|-
|| Show the model tree.

Click the eye icon to hide the Shape object.
|| A new Solid object appears in the tree.Hide the Shape object as before.

Now we can see only the Solid object
|-
|| Select the solid object.

Select the '''Part''' menu. Click '''Check''' '''geometry'''.

Check the box for Advanced shape content and leave others as default.

Click Run Check in the menu.

Select the drop down of the shape content.

Show the solid.

Click '''Close'''.
|| To check if it’s a valid solid, select the solid object from the model tree.

Go to the '''Part''' menu and select '''Check Geometry'''.

In the left panel, '''Settings''' menu opens with check boxes.

Check the box for '''Advanced '''shape content and leave others as default.Click the''' Run Check''' button in the menu..

Now select the drop down of the shape content.

You can see the shape type as solid.

Now click the '''Close''' button.
|-
|| Select the Solid object.

Select the Part menu.

Click create a copy.

Click refine shape.
|| To remove redundant faces, select the solid object from the model tree.

Go to the '''Part '''menu, click '''Create a copy'''.

From the submenu select '''Refine shape'''.This cleans up planar faces left by the mesh conversion.
|-
|| Model showing refined solid
|| The refined model now appears smoother and cleaner.
|-
|| Switch to Part Design Workbench
|| Let’s now switch to the''' Part Design Workbench''' to modify the solid.
|-
|| Select the refined solid.

Click '''Create''' '''Body'''.
|| Select the refined solid in the tree.Click on the '''Create Body''' tool.This converts it into a '''BaseFeature '''under the '''Body.'''
|-
|| Click on the workspace.

Set the view to top.

Select the bottom face of the hole. Click '''Create''' '''Sketch'''.
|| Click on the blank space to deselect the selection.

Set the view to top.

Select the bottom face of the hole and click '''Create Sketch'''.
|-
|| Select the '''Toggle grid '''tool.

Select the '''Toggle snap''' tool.

Select the drop down near the toggle snap tool.

In the drop down enable '''Snap to grid.'''
|| In the''' Sketcher''', let's draw a circle in the middle of the hole.

Select the''' Toggle grid''' tool.

Select the''' Toggle snap''' tool.

Now select the drop down near the Toggle snap tool.

In the drop down ensure '''Snap to grid''' is enabled.
|-
|| Now select toggle construction geometry tool.

Show the tools.
|| Now select '''Toggle construction geometry''' tool.

Some sketcher tools now appear in blue colour.

This mode is used to draw construction lines.

These construction lines do not appear in the final sketch.
|-
|| Select the '''View section''' tool.

Select the '''Create line''' tool.

Zoom in to the hole.
|| Select the '''View section''' tool.

Select the''' Create line''' tool.

Zoom in to the hole.
|-
|| Place the cursor where the left side of the circle touches the grid.

Left click and draw a straight line to the right end of the circle.

Place the cursor where the top side of the circle touches the grid.

Left click and draw a straight line to the bottom of the circle.
|| Place the cursor where the left side of the circle touches the grid.

Left click and draw a straight line to the right end of the circle.

Do the same to draw a line from top to bottom.
|-
|| Select the '''Toggle construction geometry''' tool.
|| Now select the''' Toggle construction geometry''' tool.

This exits the construction mode.
|-
|| Select the create circle tool.

Place the cursor near the intersection of the two construction lines.
|| Select the '''Create circle''' tool.

Place the cursor near the intersection of the two construction lines.

One of the lines will turn yellow in color.

You can see the constrain symmetric symbol appears near the cursor.
|-
|| Draw a circle.

Select the '''dimension''' tool.

Set the '''Diameter''' to 25mm.

Click close.
|| Left click in the middle and draw a circle.

Set the diameter to 25 mm using the '''Dimension''' tool.

Close the sketcher.
|-
|| Select Pocket tool.

Select the type as through all.

Click ok.
|| With the sketch selected, click on the '''Pocket''' tool.In the dialog box, set the Type to '''Through All'''.Click '''OK'''.
|-
|| Show the model.
|| A hole is now created through the solid.This shows how we can edit '''STL''' models in '''FreeCAD''' after conversion.
|-
|| Select the file and click '''Save As.'''

Enter the name as '''Example_edited.'''

Click '''Save'''.
|| To save the file, go to '''File''' and click '''Save As'''.Enter the file name as '''Example_edited.FCStd''' and click '''Save'''.

Users may save the file with a different name.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we learnt to:
* Export a FreeCAD model to STL format.
* Import an STL file into FreeCAD.
* Convert an STL mesh to a solid.
* Refine the solid and modify it in Part Design.
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Assignment'''
# Import '''Example.stl''' file into '''FreeCAD'''.
# Convert it to a solid and refine it.
# Create a circle of 30 mm in the center of the hole
# Extrude the sketch 70 mm.
|| As an '''assignment''', please do the following:
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Thank You'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private limited SINE IIT Bombay

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

FreeCAD/C3/Working-with-STL-Files-in-FreeCAD/English

2025-12-01T06:57:01Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script: Working with STL Files in FreeCAD''' '''Author: Jakub Michalski''' '''Keywords: FreeCAD, STL, mesh, shape, solid, pocket, 3D modeling, video tutorial.'..."

'''Title of the script: Working with STL Files in FreeCAD'''
'''Author: Jakub Michalski'''
'''Keywords: FreeCAD, STL, mesh, shape, solid, pocket, 3D modeling, video tutorial.'''

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Working with STL Files''' in '''FreeCAD'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Export a FreeCAD model to STL format.
* Import an STL file into FreeCAD.
* Convert an STL mesh into a solid.
* Refine the solid and make modifications.
|-
|| '''Slide 3 '''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using:
* '''Windows 11'''
* '''FreeCAD version 1.0.0'''
|-
|| '''Slide 4 '''

'''Prerequisite'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should know the basics of the '''FreeCAD''' interface and navigation.
|-
|| Click '''Help''' menu

In the drop down click '''Start'''.
|| Let’s open FreeCAD.

Go to the '''Help''' menu.

In the drop down click '''Start''' option.
|-
|| In the start menu, scroll down.

Under examples, select the PartDesignExample.FCStd file.
|| Scroll down to see the examples.

Under examples select the '''PartDesignExample.FCStd '''file.

'''PartDesignExample''' model loads in a new file.
|-
|| Select the body in the model tree.

Select file and click export.
|| Now let us export the '''FreeCAD''' file into '''STL '''format.

Select the '''Body''' in the '''Model''' tree. Go to '''File '''and select '''Export''' or press''' Ctrl + E.'''
|-
|| Select the Save as type as STL Mesh (*.stl * .ast) format.

Type the File name as Example.stl and click Save.
|| Export File dialog box opens.

In the dialog box, select the '''Save as type''' as '''STL Mesh '''format.

Type the File name as '''Example''' and click '''Save'''.

Users can save the file with some other name as well. This exports the part as an STL mesh file.
|-
|| Select file and click new.
|| Now, let’s create a new file.Go to '''File''' click '''New'''
|-
|| Select file and click import.

Set the file type to '''STL''' Mesh '''(*.stl *.STL *.ast *.AST)'''

Select the '''Example.stl''' file. Click '''Open'''.
|| In the new file, go to '''File''' and select '''Import'''.

Set the file type to '''STL Mesh.'''

Select the''' Example.stl''' file and click '''Open'''
|-
|| STL Model in 3D view
|| The model is imported into the workspace.
|-
|| Select the dropdown next to Draw style.

Select Flat lines option.
|| By default the draw style is set to '''Shaded'''.

Select the dropdown next to''' Draw style''' and select''' Flat lines''' option.This helps to clearly see the triangular meshes.
|-
|| Switch to '''Part''' '''Workbench'''
|| Switch to the '''Part Workbench'''.
|-
|| In the model tree select the model mesh.Go to the '''Part''' menu.

Click '''Create shape from mesh''' option.
|| In the model tree select the model mesh.Go to the '''Part''' menu and click '''Create shape from mesh''' option.
|-
|| Point to the pop window

Click OK.
|| '''Shape From Mesh''' pop up window opens.

Let’s leave the settings as default and click '''OK.'''
|-
|| Show the model tree.

Click the eye icon to hide the mesh.
|| A new '''Shape''' object is created in the tree.Hide the old '''Mesh''' object by clicking on its eye icon.
|-
|| Show in the model.
|| This shape now allows selection of faces, edges, and vertices.We can use it for measurements or further modeling.
|-
|| Select the shape object from the model tree.

Select part. Click Convert to solid.
|| To create a solid, select the shape object .

Go to the''' Part''' menu and click''' Convert to solid'''.
|-
|| Show the model tree.

Click the eye icon to hide the Shape object.
|| A new Solid object appears in the tree.Hide the Shape object as before.

Now we can see only the Solid object
|-
|| Select the solid object.

Select the '''Part''' menu. Click '''Check''' '''geometry'''.

Check the box for Advanced shape content and leave others as default.

Click Run Check in the menu.

Select the drop down of the shape content.

Show the solid.

Click '''Close'''.
|| To check if it’s a valid solid, select the solid object from the model tree.

Go to the '''Part''' menu and select '''Check Geometry'''.

In the left panel, '''Settings''' menu opens with check boxes.

Check the box for '''Advanced '''shape content and leave others as default.Click the''' Run Check''' button in the menu..

Now select the drop down of the shape content.

You can see the shape type as solid.

Now click the '''Close''' button.
|-
|| Select the Solid object.

Select the Part menu.

Click create a copy.

Click refine shape.
|| To remove redundant faces, select the solid object from the model tree.

Go to the '''Part '''menu, click '''Create a copy'''.

From the submenu select '''Refine shape'''.This cleans up planar faces left by the mesh conversion.
|-
|| Model showing refined solid
|| The refined model now appears smoother and cleaner.
|-
|| Switch to Part Design Workbench
|| Let’s now switch to the''' Part Design Workbench''' to modify the solid.
|-
|| Select the refined solid.

Click '''Create''' '''Body'''.
|| Select the refined solid in the tree.Click on the '''Create Body''' tool.This converts it into a '''BaseFeature '''under the '''Body.'''
|-
|| Click on the workspace.

Set the view to top.

Select the bottom face of the hole. Click '''Create''' '''Sketch'''.
|| Click on the blank space to deselect the selection.

Set the view to top.

Select the bottom face of the hole and click '''Create Sketch'''.
|-
|| Select the '''Toggle grid '''tool.

Select the '''Toggle snap''' tool.

Select the drop down near the toggle snap tool.

In the drop down enable '''Snap to grid.'''
|| In the''' Sketcher''', let's draw a circle in the middle of the hole.

Select the''' Toggle grid''' tool.

Select the''' Toggle snap''' tool.

Now select the drop down near the Toggle snap tool.

In the drop down ensure '''Snap to grid''' is enabled.
|-
|| Now select toggle construction geometry tool.

Show the tools.
|| Now select '''Toggle construction geometry''' tool.

Some sketcher tools now appear in blue colour.

This mode is used to draw construction lines.

These construction lines do not appear in the final sketch.
|-
|| Select the '''View section''' tool.

Select the '''Create line''' tool.

Zoom in to the hole.
|| Select the '''View section''' tool.

Select the''' Create line''' tool.

Zoom in to the hole.
|-
|| Place the cursor where the left side of the circle touches the grid.

Left click and draw a straight line to the right end of the circle.

Place the cursor where the top side of the circle touches the grid.

Left click and draw a straight line to the bottom of the circle.
|| Place the cursor where the left side of the circle touches the grid.

Left click and draw a straight line to the right end of the circle.

Do the same to draw a line from top to bottom.
|-
|| Select the '''Toggle construction geometry''' tool.
|| Now select the''' Toggle construction geometry''' tool.

This exits the construction mode.
|-
|| Select the create circle tool.

Place the cursor near the intersection of the two construction lines.
|| Select the '''Create circle''' tool.

Place the cursor near the intersection of the two construction lines.

One of the lines will turn yellow in color.

You can see the constrain symmetric symbol appears near the cursor.
|-
|| Draw a circle.

Select the '''dimension''' tool.

Set the '''Diameter''' to 25mm.

Click close.
|| Left click in the middle and draw a circle.

Set the diameter to 25 mm using the '''Dimension''' tool.

Close the sketcher.
|-
|| Select Pocket tool.

Select the type as through all.

Click ok.
|| With the sketch selected, click on the '''Pocket''' tool.In the dialog box, set the Type to '''Through All'''.Click '''OK'''.
|-
|| Show the model.
|| A hole is now created through the solid.This shows how we can edit '''STL''' models in '''FreeCAD''' after conversion.
|-
|| Select the file and click '''Save As.'''

Enter the name as '''Example_edited.'''

Click '''Save'''.
|| To save the file, go to '''File''' and click '''Save As'''.Enter the file name as '''Example_edited.FCStd''' and click '''Save'''.

Users may save the file with a different name.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we learnt to:
* Export a FreeCAD model to STL format.
* Import an STL file into FreeCAD.
* Convert an STL mesh to a solid.
* Refine the solid and modify it in Part Design.
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Assignment'''
# Import '''Example.stl''' file into '''FreeCAD'''.
# Convert it to a solid and refine it.
# Create a circle of 30 mm in the center of the hole
# Extrude the sketch 70 mm.
|| As an '''assignment''', please do the following:
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Thank You'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private limited SINE IIT Bombay

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Conversational-AI-Tools/C2/Debugging-with-AI/English

2025-11-22T13:15:09Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script: Debugging with AI ''' '''Author: Sudhakar Kumar and EduPyramids Team.''' '''Keywords''': debugging, errors, messages, optimize, ai, video tutorial...."

'''Title of the script: Debugging with AI '''

'''Author: Sudhakar Kumar and EduPyramids Team.'''

'''Keywords''': debugging, errors, messages, optimize, ai, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide '''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Debugging with AI.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to use ChatGPT to
* Decode the error messages shown by the compiler
* Detect edge cases
* Optimize and improve code
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''

To record this tutorial, I am using
* Ubuntu Linux OS v22.04
* Firefox web browser v141.0.4
* Linux Terminal and g++ compiler
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4 '''

'''Pre-requisites '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of:
* Using internet, and
* Programming in C/C++
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files'''

The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.
# '''con.cpp'''
# '''sumOfElems.cpp'''
# '''primeNums.cpp'''

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the''' Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| To open the text editor, type the command in the terminal.

Type: '''gedit con.cpp &'''

'''<nowiki>#include <iostream></nowiki>'''

'''int main() {'''

'''const int x = 5;'''

'''int* ptr = &x; '''

'''<nowiki>*ptr = 10;</nowiki>'''

'''std::cout << x << std::endl;'''

'''return 0;'''

'''}'''

Type:''' g++ con.cpp -o output '''to compile the code.

Highlight the error message in the compiler
|| Open the Linux terminal and type this command to open con.cpp file.

Let us compile the code in the linux terminal.

For that type this command and press Enter

We can see an error in the code.

The error message states the invalid conversion from 'const int*' to 'int*'
|-
||
|| This error message may not clearly indicate the actual issue in the code.

Let us take help from ChatGPT.
|-
|| Click on the '''Projects '''icon in the left panel.''' '''

In the '''Project name '''box,''' '''type the name as '''Debugging with AI'''.

Click on the Create''' project''' button.
|| Create a New Project with the name of '''Debugging with AI'''.
|-
|| Highlight''' Debugging with AI'''
|| For this tutorial, we will use this project workspace.
|-
|| Cursor on Chat window

Here is my code:

'''<nowiki>#include <iostream></nowiki>'''

'''int main() {'''

'''const int x = 5;'''

'''int* ptr = &x; '''

'''<nowiki>*ptr = 10;</nowiki>'''

'''std::cout << x << std::endl;'''

'''return 0;'''

'''}'''

'''I have a C++ code that gives the following compilation error:'''

'''The error message states the invalid conversion from 'const int*' to 'int*' Explain why this error occurs and how to fix it. '''
|| In the Chat window, copy paste the code.

Type the following prompt and

Press Enter.
|-
|| Highlight the generated response in the Chat window

Highlight Copy Code in the Chat window.

Click on the copy code button.

Copy paste the corrected code and click on Save button.

To compile type: '''g++ con.cpp -o output.'''

Type '''./output'''Highlight the corrected output.
|| It first goes through the code and explains why the error is happening.

Next, it suggests how to fix it and gives the corrected code.

We can copy the code by clicking the Copy code icon.

Open the text editor and paste the copied code.

Save the file.

Let’s go back to the terminal and compile the corrected code.

Compilation is done, let's see the output.

Here the output is shown successfully.
|-
|| Open file '''sumOfElems.cpp''' in the text editor.

Type: '''gedit sumOfElems.cpp &'''

'''Highlight:'''

'''int sumVector(const std::vector<int>& nums) {'''

'''int sum = 0;'''

'''for (int num : nums) {'''

'''sum += num; '''

'''}'''

'''return sum;'''

'''}'''
|| Let’s see another code.

Open file '''sumOfElems.cpp''' in the text editor.

We have a function '''sumVector'''.

It prints, sum of the elements present in the vector.
|-
|| Highlight the following piece of code

'''std::cout << "Sum of small numbers: " << sumVector(smallNumbers) << std::endl;'''

'''std::cout << "Sum of large numbers: " << sumVector(largeNumbers) << std::endl;'''
|| The first cout statement should print Sum of small numbers: 15

And, the second cout statement should print:

Sum of large numbers:

That is forty-five followed by eight zeros.
|-
|| To compile type: '''g++ sumOfElems.cpp -o output'''

'''Type:./output'''

To run the code.

Highlight the output
|| Let’s compile the code in the terminal

For that type this command and press enter.After the compilation, Type this command to run the code.

The output for the first cout statement is given correctly.

However, the output for the second cout statement is incorrect.

It means that our code works fine for small numbers but not for large numbers.
|-
||
|| Let us ask ChatGPT to help out.
|-
|| Point to the file

Click''' New Chat'''

Type the following in ChatGPT and press Enter. I have attached a file named '''sumOfElems.cpp. '''

'''Analyze this code and find any potential bugs or edge cases. '''

'''Explain why each issue occurs and suggest fixes.'''
|| I have saved the program as '''sumOfElems.cpp''' on my system.

Go to the workspace of the project '''Debugging with AI'''.

In a '''New chat''', click on Add files and upload the file '''sumOfElems.cpp'''.

type the following prompt to analyze this code.

And, press Enter.
|-
|| Highlight the generated response
|| ChatGPT points out that the code may not work for large numbers.

ChatGPT suggests alternate corrected code.Users may compile the corrected code on their own.
|-
|| Open '''primeNums.cpp''' in text editorType''': gedit primeNums.cpp &Highlight''':

'''<nowiki>#include <iostream></nowiki>'''

'''vector<int> numbers = { 2, 15, 17, 20, 23, 30 };'''

'''cout << "Prime numbers : " << endl;'''

'''for (int i = 0; i < numbers.size(); i++) {'''

'''if (isPrime(numbers[i])) {'''

'''cout << numbers[i] << " ";'''

'''}'''

'''}'''

Type:''' g++ primeNums.cpp -o output '''to compile the code.

Type:''' ./output'''
|| Now, let’s see the next code about Prime Numbers.

For each element in a vector, the program checks if it is a prime number or not.

Then prints it if it is a prime number.

Let’s compile the code.

Compilation is successful. Now let us run the code.

We can see that the prime numbers are correctly printed.
|-
||
|| Let us ask ChatGPT whether this program can be further optimized.
|-
|| Highlight the Chat window in the project workspace

Refer to the attached code '''primeNums.cpp.'''

It prints the prime numbers present in a vector.

Review and optimize this code.

'''Explain any changes or improvements to make.'''
|| Go to the workspace of the project Debugging with AI.

Click on Add files and upload '''primeNums.cpp '''file

In a New chat, type the following and press Enter.
|-
|| Highlight the corresponding terms in the generated response
|| ChatGPT offers a few suggestions that we can optimize in our code.
|-
||
|| To know more about debugging with AI, refer to the Additional reading Material available on this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt how to use ChatGPT to
* Decode the error messages shown by the compiler
* Detect edge cases
* Optimize and improve code
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial. Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Assignment '''

Given a positive integer n, write a C++ code to find the nth Fibonacci number.

Give this code to ChatGPT and get it reviewed for improvements.
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by '''EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited''', '''SINE, IIT Bombay.'''Thank you for joining!
|-
|}

Conversational-AI-Tools/C2/Coding-with-AI/English

2025-11-22T10:10:29Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script''': '''Coding with AI''' '''Author''': '''Sudhakar Kumar and EduPyramids Team.''' '''Keywords''': chatgpt, ai, assistant, code, review, video tutorial..."

'''Title of the script''': '''Coding with AI'''

'''Author''': '''Sudhakar Kumar and EduPyramids Team.'''

'''Keywords''': chatgpt, ai, assistant, code, review, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide '''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Coding with AI'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to use ChatGPT to
* Explain programming concepts and
* Get our code reviewed
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''

To record this tutorial, I am using
* Ubuntu Linux OS v22.04
* Firefox web browser v141.0.4
* Visual Studio Code v1.100.3
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4 '''

'''Pre-requisites '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of:
* Using internet, and
* Programming in C/C++
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files'''

The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.
# '''strReverse.cpp'''
# '''abstractCls.cpp'''

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the''' Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Significance of Conversational AI'''
|| * Tools like ChatGPT can serve as a reliable coding assistant.
* It can help with syntax, explain tricky concepts, review your code, and suggest optimizations.
* It is like a knowledgeable

Colleague you can ask anytime for guidance.
|-
||
|| Suppose I forgot how to use '''typedef '''in C programming.

Let us go to ChatGPT and ask how to use '''typedef'''.
|-
|| '''Go to the left Panel and Click on New Project.'''
|| First, let us create a New project.
|-
|| Highlight Projects on the left side of the pageClick on Projects.

Type name:''' C/C++ Programming'''

Click on Create Project button.
|| Projects help us organize our work better.

Projects keep chats, files, and custom instructions in one place.

Click on '''Projects''' and enter a name of your choice.

I will add the name, '''C/C++ Programming'''.

Click on '''Create Project'''.
|-
|| Highlight C/C++ Programming under Projects
|| Observe that the project is created.
|-
|| Highlight the name C/C++ Programming above Ask Anything
|| The name of the project appears above the Chat window.

It indicates that we are now in the workspace of our project.
|-
|| Highlight the Chat window in the project workspace
|| Let us now ask our queries here.
|-
|| Type:

'''Explain how to use typedef in C programming with some examples.''' Press Enter.
|| Type,

'''Explain how to use typedef in C programming with some examples.''' Press Enter.
|-
|| Highlight the generated response in the Chat window
|| ChatGPT first explains what a '''typedef '''is, followed by its syntax and usage.
|-
||
|| Now, suppose I have written some code.

I want ChatGPT to review it.
|-
|| '''<nowiki>#include <iostream></nowiki>'''

'''<nowiki>#include <string></nowiki>'''

'''using namespace std;'''

'''int main() {'''

'''string str = "Spoken Tutorial";'''

'''string rev = "";'''

'''for (int i = str.size() - 1; i >= 0; i--) {'''

'''rev += str[i];'''

'''}'''

'''cout << "Reversed: " << rev << endl;'''

'''return 0;'''

'''}'''
|| I have written a C++ code to reverse a string.

The code works fine, but I want ChatGPT to suggest improvements.

For that, we can directly copy and paste the code in the Chat window.

Then give the prompt.
|-
|| Highlight Chat under C/C++ Programming

'''Type''': You are a C++ software engineer.

I have written a code, strReverse.cpp which reverses a string.

Please review it for correctness, readability, and best practices.
|| Type this promptPress Enter.
|-
|| Highlight the generated response in the Chat window
|| Observe that it first confirms the correctness of the program.

Next, it checks for readability, best practices, and improvements.

If needed, we can ask follow-up questions.
|-
||
|| We can ask ChatGPT to explain some code as well.
|-
|| Open '''abstractCls.cpp''' in visual studio code editor and highlight the following part

'''class Shape {'''

'''public:'''

'''virtual double area() const = 0;'''

'''};'''
|| I have a class-based code that uses an abstract class.

I want to understand why an abstract class is being used in this code.
|-
|| Highlight abstractCls.cpp on the Desktop
|| I have saved this program as '''abstractCls.cpp''' on my '''system'''.

Let us add this file to the project workspace.

Click on the project titled C/C++ Programming.
|-
|| Click''' File icon '''and upload
|| Click on the Add Files icon and upload '''abstractCls.cpp '''file
|-
|| Type the command in the ChatGPT:

'''You are a C++ software engineer.

I have attached a file abstractCls.cpp which has an abstract class.

Go through the code and explain why an abstract class is needed in this code.'''
|| In the Chat window, type the following prompt.

Press Enter and observe the response.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt how to use ChatGPT to
* Explain programming concepts
* Get our code reviewed
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Assignment '''

As an assignment,
* Create a new project and give the C++ code that reverses a string to ChatGPT.
* Ask it to write an equivalent Python code.
* Ensure that both programs produce the same results.
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Private limited SINE IIT BombayThank you for joining!
|-
|}

Freeplane/C2/Creating-a-Mind-Map/English

2025-11-22T09:13:26Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title: Creating a Mind Map'''

'''Author: Saisudha Sugavanam and Madhuri Ganapathi'''

'''Graphics by: Anjali Satdive'''

'''Keywords''': Mind map, photosynthesis, requirements, process, products, EduPyramids, Spoken Tutorial, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide '''
|| Welcome to this Spoken Tutorial on '''Creating a Mind Map'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will,

Explore how to create a '''mind map''' through simple step-by-step instructions.

Build 4 to 6 main branches from the central idea.

Apply the method using Photosynthesis as an example.
|-
|| Graphic: Person thinking with colourful branches
|| What exactly is a '''mind map'''?A '''mind map''' is a picture of how our brain thinks.

It starts from an idea in the centre and expands in all directions.

Our brain loves colour, pictures and patterns.It doesn’t like long lists.
|-
|| Graphic: Example- “Holiday Planning” '''mind map'''
|| Let us see Riya in action. Riya uses '''mind map'''s to plan, take  notes or brainstorm ideas.

For example, planning a trip, executing a trip and enjoying the planned holiday. 
|-
|| Graphic: Notebook and coloured pens
|| Now it's time to create a map by hand.

All we need is a sheet of paper and coloured pens or pencils.
|-
|| Graphic: Blank page with circle in centre
|| Now let’s write the main idea in the centre of the page.

Draw a circle or bubble around it.

Let’s write photosynthesis. This is our central idea.So, what is photosynthesis?

It is the process by which green plants, algae, and some bacteria use sunlight, carbon dioxide, and water to produce glucose and release oxygen.
|-
|| Graphic: Three main branches grow outward
|| Step 2: Draw thick, curved branches from the centre.

Each branch represents a key idea.

For Photosynthesis, let’s add Requirements, Process and Products.

Use a different colour for each branch.
|-
|| Graphic: Add smaller branches under Requirements
|| Step 3: Let us add smaller branches for supporting details.Under Requirements, let’s add Sunlight, Water, CO₂ and Chlorophyll.

We will use one keyword per branch.This will keep ideas flexible.Add little drawings such as sun, a leaf, a drop of water. Our brain loves images!
|-
|| Graphic: Add branches under ProcessShow arrows to indicate flow and cause and effect.
|| Under Process, let’s add Light Reaction and Dark Reaction.
|-
|| Graphic: Add branches under Products
|| Under Products, let’s write Glucose and Oxygen.

Now connect Glucose to Energy for Plant Growth.
|-
|| Graphic: '''Mind map''' growing radiantly
|| Step 4: Let's keep expanding. Don’t worry about neatness.

Every '''mind map''' is unique.

Pause here and think, what other ideas can you add?
|-
|| Graphic: Add colour and doodles
|| Step 5: Let us use colours and shapes to make it memorable.

Colours stimulate memory and keep both sides of our brain active.
|-
|| Graphic: Completed '''mind map''' displayed
|| And that’s it!  Photosynthesis '''mind map''' is ready.

Here we can see the entire process in one glance.
|-
|| Graphic: Teacher with students creating maps
|| '''Mind map'''s aren’t only for study; they’re for life!

Teachers can use them to introduce new topics or summarise lessons.

Students can create their own maps as a classroom activity.

It encourages imagination, critical thinking and creativity.
|-
|| Graphic: Benefits list appears
|| '''Mind map'''s help us to:

1. Connect ideas visually

2. Recall concepts quickly

3. Engage in active learning instead of rote memorisation

4. Stimulate creative thinking and long-term memory
|-
|| Graphic: Everyday uses – goal setting, planning, decisions
|| We can use '''mind map'''s to plan our week, set goals or make decisions.

The same method works for any topic from science to self-growth.
|-
|| Graphic: Hand-drawn map fades into digital version
|| When hand-drawing becomes easy, try Freeplane to create and share maps.

Let’s learn to create maps using Freeplane in our next tutorial- Introduction to Freeplane.
|-
|| Graphic: Radiant brain image expanding outward
|| Please remember: Every '''mind map''' begins with one idea and radiates outward.

That’s exactly how our brain thinks- radiantly and creatively!
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''Summary Slide'''
|| Let’s summarise.A '''mind map''' is  a visual tool that shows connections between ideas.

We created a '''mind map''' using Photosynthesis as an example.

We used keywords, colours and images to make it clear and memorable.

'''Mind map'''s help anyone learn, teach, plan and think more creatively.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Assignment Slide'''
|| Here’s an assignment for you.Choose a topic you know well like, Healthy Eating or Time Management.Create a '''mind map''' using these steps. 

Use keywords, colours and drawings.

Share it with a friend or classmate and compare your maps.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Pvt. Ltd. SIN E, IIT Bombay. Thank you for learning radiantly with us!
|-
|}

Classroom-Skills/C2/Creating-a-Lesson-Plan/English

2025-11-22T09:02:52Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: Creating a Lesson Plan.''' '''Author: Saisudha Sugavanam and Madhuri Ganapathi''' '''Graphics by: Ketki Bhamble''' '''Keywords:''' lesson plan, gene..."

'''Title of the Script: Creating a Lesson Plan.'''

'''Author: Saisudha Sugavanam and Madhuri Ganapathi'''

'''Graphics by: Ketki Bhamble'''

'''Keywords:''' lesson plan, general information, learning outcomes, action verbs, lesson activities, teacher role, student role, duration, resources, assessment for learning, formative assessment, summative assessment, key competencies, collaboration, communication, critical thinking, reversible and irreversible changes, observation table, peer review, assignment, edupyramids, spoken tutorial, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide '''
|| Hello and welcome to the Spoken tutorial on '''Creating a Lesson Plan.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to create a '''lesson plan'''.

This '''lesson plan''' is based on the format prescribed by CBSE
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| By the end of this tutorial, the teacher will be able to:
* Identify the key components of a '''lesson plan''' and
* Write each part with clear details
|-
|| Teacher entering class without notes
|| Have you ever entered a class with ideas in your head but no written plan?

Things can quickly go off track.

Important points get missed, and the lesson doesn’t finish on time.
|-
|| Teacher holding a written '''lesson plan'''
|| That’s why we need a '''lesson plan'''.

A '''lesson plan''' is like a roadmap.

It tells us what to teach and how to teach a topic.

It helps confirm if students have actually learned the concept.
|-
|| 1: '''General Information'''

2: '''Learning Outcomes'''

3: '''Lesson Activities'''

4: '''Assessment for Learning''' and

5: '''Key Competencies'''
|| A good '''lesson plan''' should have all these five key components.

We will link each step to one example and show how to adapt it.
|-
|| Teacher with class
|| Imagine you are a Grade 6 Science teacher.

The topic is '''Reversible and Irreversible Changes'''.

We will use this as our running example in every step.

Please remember: this is just one example.

Please adapt each step for your own subject and class.
|-
|| Highlight: '''General Information'''

Images of ice cubes, matchsticks, clay, rubber band, paper, candle and observation sheets.
|| Step 1 is '''general information'''. We need to write the following:

Subject, Class/Grade, Chapter/Topic, Duration in minutes, and Resources.

Please add only what you will realistically use in the class.

For this example: Subject is Science.

Class is VI.

Duration is 30 minutes.

Resources are ice cubes, matchsticks, clay, rubber band, paper, candle and observation sheets.

Why is this step important?

It sets the context and time needed, helping you manage the class well.

The resources list ensures you are fully prepared for the class.
|-
||
|| Step 2 is '''Learning Outcomes'''.

Write 1 or 2 measurable outcomes with strong '''action verbs'''.

For example identify, describe, classify, compare, explain, apply, create, etc.

Using '''action verbs''' makes the '''learning outcomes''' measurable.

Please avoid using vague verbs like know or understand.

Can you measure how much a student has understood?

Or

How much do they know?

That’s why we avoid these verbs.
|-
|| Highlight: '''Learning Outcomes'''
|| For this example, the learning outcome can be:

By the end of the class, the students will be able to:

Differentiate between reversible and irreversible changes.

Give examples of reversible or irreversible changes.

Why is this step important?

Clear outcomes guide your teaching and make assessment straightforward.
|-
||
|| Step 3 is writing lesson activities.

Activities make learning active and ensure time is used well.

For each activity, specify:

Duration, Objective, Materials, Teacher actions and Student actions.

Also include an assessment check.

Keep the total timing within the lesson duration.
|-
|| Activity 1 (Teacher lights match)
|| For activity 1:

The objective is to introduce the concept and spark curiosity.

Duration is 10 minutes.

Materials needed: matchsticks for demo.

Teacher’s action: Lighting a match stick.

The teacher asks, Can this change be reversed?

Why or why not? and probe with follow-ups.

You could ask students: 'What is happening to the match stick?'

Write Student actions:

What will the students do when you are performing the above action?

Observe, share ideas, and listen to peers.

Assessment check: Note initial ideas/misconceptions.

Why this step is important: Writing these details makes it clear.

You will know what will happen and how long it will take.
|-
|| Activity 2 (Students in groups)
|| Activity 2

Duration: 20 minutes.

Objective: explore '''reversible and irreversible changes'''.

Materials per group: ice cubes, clay, paper. (optionally: copper sulphate or Zinc oxide), and observation sheets.

Teacher’s action:

Form groups of 4 to 5 students.

Issue materials to the groups.

Remind students about safety while using the materials.

Demonstration: how to test a material by heating, stretching, or tearing.

Go around the class and ask 'What do you see before and after?'

Can we reverse this change?

Hand out sheets to students and ask them to record the observations.

Student action: Work in groups

Perform the assigned tasks.

Record observations in a tabular form.

Discuss with group mates and share ideas.

Assessment check: Listen for evidence‑based justifications of 'reversible/irreversible.'

The sample observation sheet is available as a code file.
|-
|| How to check learning?
|| Step 4 is '''Assessment for Learning'''.

It is important to check progress during and after the lesson.

Teacher can do that by building small checks into each activity.

The checks can be questions, observations or peer feedback.

For Example: Ask 'Why do you think so?' during activities.

Ask the students to use a thumbs‑up/thumbs‑down to respond for the given activity.

End the class with a homework or post-class reflection.

For example: 'Write one reversible change you observed today.'
|-
||
|| Step 5 is listing '''key competencies'''.

What are '''key competencies'''?:

They are abilities and attitudes developed while learning.

For example: '''Collaboration''', '''Communication''' and '''Critical Thinking'''.

You may also add Creativity, Problem‑solving, etc.

Why are these important?

They prepare students for real‑life situations beyond academics.

How do we incorporate competencies in students?

Plan activities where students must talk, work in groups, solve problems, or present ideas.

This is how you can document your plan.

Note the competency next to each activity.

For example, Activity 1 develops Curiosity and '''Critical Thinking'''.

Activity 2 develops '''Collaboration''' and '''Communication'''.

By documenting you show that you are intentionally building skills.
|-
|| Completed '''Lesson Plan''' shown

outcomes,activities, assessment, with timing and roles
|| Now you can see how Steps 1 to 5 connect.

Keep reviewing your '''learning outcomes''' to stay on track.

The sample '''lesson plan''' is available as a code file.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Assignment'''

As an assignment, choose a topic from your subject.

Create a full '''lesson plan''' for the topic by applying the below five steps:
* '''General Information'''
* '''Learning Outcomes'''
* '''Lesson Activities'''
* '''Assessment for Learning'''
* '''Key Competencies'''.

Share your plan with a colleague and refine it with feedback.
|| As an assignment, choose a topic from your subject.

Create a full '''lesson plan''' for the topic by applying the below five steps:

Then share your plan with a colleague and refine it with feedback.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Thank you.'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Pvt. Ltd. SINE IIT Bombay.

Thank you for joining!
|-
|}

Freeplane/C2/Creating-a-Mind-Map/English

2025-11-22T08:02:15Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title: Creating a Mind Map'''

'''Author: Saisudha Sugavanam and Madhuri Ganapathi'''

'''Keywords''': Mind map,photosynthesis,video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide '''
|| Welcome to this Spoken Tutorial on '''Creating a Mind Map'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will,

Explore how to create a '''mind map''' through simple step-by-step instructions.

Build 4 to 6 main branches from the central idea.

Apply the method using Photosynthesis as an example.
|-
|| Graphic: Person thinking with colourful branches
|| What exactly is a '''mind map'''?A '''mind map''' is a picture of how our brain thinks.

It starts from an idea in the centre and expands in all directions.

Our brain loves colour, pictures and patterns.It doesn’t like long lists.
|-
|| Graphic: Example- “Holiday Planning” '''mind map'''
|| Let us see Riya in action. Riya uses '''mind map'''s to plan, take  notes or brainstorm ideas.

For example, planning a trip, executing a trip and enjoying the planned holiday. 
|-
|| Graphic: Notebook and coloured pens
|| Now it's time to create a map by hand.

All we need is a sheet of paper and coloured pens or pencils.
|-
|| Graphic: Blank page with circle in centre
|| Now let’s write the main idea in the centre of the page.

Draw a circle or bubble around it.

Let’s write photosynthesis. This is our central idea.So, what is photosynthesis?

It is the process by which green plants, algae, and some bacteria use sunlight, carbon dioxide, and water to produce glucose and release oxygen.
|-
|| Graphic: Three main branches grow outward
|| Step 2: Draw thick, curved branches from the centre.

Each branch represents a key idea.

For Photosynthesis, let’s add Requirements, Process and Products.

Use a different colour for each branch.
|-
|| Graphic: Add smaller branches under Requirements
|| Step 3: Let us add smaller branches for supporting details.Under Requirements, let’s add Sunlight, Water, CO₂ and Chlorophyll.

We will use one keyword per branch.This will keep ideas flexible.Add little drawings such as sun, a leaf, a drop of water. Our brain loves images!
|-
|| Graphic: Add branches under ProcessShow arrows to indicate flow and cause and effect.
|| Under Process, let’s add Light Reaction and Dark Reaction.
|-
|| Graphic: Add branches under Products
|| Under Products, let’s write Glucose and Oxygen.

Now connect Glucose to Energy for Plant Growth.
|-
|| Graphic: '''Mind map''' growing radiantly
|| Step 4: Let's keep expanding. Don’t worry about neatness.

Every '''mind map''' is unique.

Pause here and think, what other ideas can you add?
|-
|| Graphic: Add colour and doodles
|| Step 5: Let us use colours and shapes to make it memorable.

Colours stimulate memory and keep both sides of our brain active.
|-
|| Graphic: Completed '''mind map''' displayed
|| And that’s it!  Photosynthesis '''mind map''' is ready.

Here we can see the entire process in one glance.
|-
|| Graphic: Teacher with students creating maps
|| '''Mind map'''s aren’t only for study; they’re for life!

Teachers can use them to introduce new topics or summarise lessons.

Students can create their own maps as a classroom activity.

It encourages imagination, critical thinking and creativity.
|-
|| Graphic: Benefits list appears
|| '''Mind map'''s help us to:

1. Connect ideas visually

2. Recall concepts quickly

3. Engage in active learning instead of rote memorisation

4. Stimulate creative thinking and long-term memory
|-
|| Graphic: Everyday uses – goal setting, planning, decisions
|| We can use '''mind map'''s to plan our week, set goals or make decisions.

The same method works for any topic from science to self-growth.
|-
|| Graphic: Hand-drawn map fades into digital version
|| When hand-drawing becomes easy, try Freeplane to create and share maps.

Let’s learn to create maps using Freeplane in our next tutorial- Introduction to Freeplane.
|-
|| Graphic: Radiant brain image expanding outward
|| Please remember: Every '''mind map''' begins with one idea and radiates outward.

That’s exactly how our brain thinks- radiantly and creatively!
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''Summary Slide'''
|| Let’s summarise.A '''mind map''' is  a visual tool that shows connections between ideas.

We created a '''mind map''' using Photosynthesis as an example.

We used keywords, colours and images to make it clear and memorable.

'''Mind map'''s help anyone learn, teach, plan and think more creatively.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Assignment Slide'''
|| Here’s an assignment for you.Choose a topic you know well like, Healthy Eating or Time Management.Create a '''mind map''' using these steps. 

Use keywords, colours and drawings.

Share it with a friend or classmate and compare your maps.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Pvt. Ltd. SIN E, IIT Bombay. Thank you for learning radiantly with us!
|-
|}

Freeplane/C2/Creating-a-Mind-Map/English

2025-11-22T07:59:41Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title: Creating a Mind Map''' '''Author: Saisudha Sugavanam and Madhuri Ganapathi''' '''Keywords: Mind map''',  photosynthesis, video tutorial. {|border=1 |- || ''..."

'''Title: Creating a Mind Map'''

'''Author: Saisudha Sugavanam and Madhuri Ganapathi'''

'''Keywords: Mind map''',  photosynthesis, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide '''
|| Welcome to this Spoken Tutorial on '''Creating a Mind Map'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will,

Explore how to create a '''mind map''' through simple step-by-step instructions.

Build 4 to 6 main branches from the central idea.

Apply the method using Photosynthesis as an example.
|-
|| Graphic: Person thinking with colourful branches
|| What exactly is a '''mind map'''?A '''mind map''' is a picture of how our brain thinks.

It starts from an idea in the centre and expands in all directions.

Our brain loves colour, pictures and patterns.It doesn’t like long lists.
|-
|| Graphic: Example- “Holiday Planning” '''mind map'''
|| Let us see Riya in action. Riya uses '''mind map'''s to plan, take  notes or brainstorm ideas.

For example, planning a trip, executing a trip and enjoying the planned holiday. 
|-
|| Graphic: Notebook and coloured pens
|| Now it's time to create a map by hand.

All we need is a sheet of paper and coloured pens or pencils.
|-
|| Graphic: Blank page with circle in centre
|| Now let’s write the main idea in the centre of the page.

Draw a circle or bubble around it.

Let’s write photosynthesis. This is our central idea.So, what is photosynthesis?

It is the process by which green plants, algae, and some bacteria use sunlight, carbon dioxide, and water to produce glucose and release oxygen.
|-
|| Graphic: Three main branches grow outward
|| Step 2: Draw thick, curved branches from the centre.

Each branch represents a key idea.

For Photosynthesis, let’s add Requirements, Process and Products.

Use a different colour for each branch.
|-
|| Graphic: Add smaller branches under Requirements
|| Step 3: Let us add smaller branches for supporting details.Under Requirements, let’s add Sunlight, Water, CO₂ and Chlorophyll.

We will use one keyword per branch.This will keep ideas flexible.Add little drawings such as sun, a leaf, a drop of water. Our brain loves images!
|-
|| Graphic: Add branches under ProcessShow arrows to indicate flow and cause and effect.
|| Under Process, let’s add Light Reaction and Dark Reaction.
|-
|| Graphic: Add branches under Products
|| Under Products, let’s write Glucose and Oxygen.

Now connect Glucose to Energy for Plant Growth.
|-
|| Graphic: '''Mind map''' growing radiantly
|| Step 4: Let's keep expanding. Don’t worry about neatness.

Every '''mind map''' is unique.

Pause here and think, what other ideas can you add?
|-
|| Graphic: Add colour and doodles
|| Step 5: Let us use colours and shapes to make it memorable.

Colours stimulate memory and keep both sides of our brain active.
|-
|| Graphic: Completed '''mind map''' displayed
|| And that’s it!  Photosynthesis '''mind map''' is ready.

Here we can see the entire process in one glance.
|-
|| Graphic: Teacher with students creating maps
|| '''Mind map'''s aren’t only for study; they’re for life!

Teachers can use them to introduce new topics or summarise lessons.

Students can create their own maps as a classroom activity.

It encourages imagination, critical thinking and creativity.
|-
|| Graphic: Benefits list appears
|| '''Mind map'''s help us to:

1. Connect ideas visually

2. Recall concepts quickly

3. Engage in active learning instead of rote memorisation

4. Stimulate creative thinking and long-term memory
|-
|| Graphic: Everyday uses – goal setting, planning, decisions
|| We can use '''mind map'''s to plan our week, set goals or make decisions.

The same method works for any topic from science to self-growth.
|-
|| Graphic: Hand-drawn map fades into digital version
|| When hand-drawing becomes easy, try Freeplane to create and share maps.

Let’s learn to create maps using Freeplane in our next tutorial- Introduction to Freeplane.
|-
|| Graphic: Radiant brain image expanding outward
|| Please remember: Every '''mind map''' begins with one idea and radiates outward.

That’s exactly how our brain thinks- radiantly and creatively!
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''Summary Slide'''
|| Let’s summarise.A '''mind map''' is  a visual tool that shows connections between ideas.

We created a '''mind map''' using Photosynthesis as an example.

We used keywords, colours and images to make it clear and memorable.

'''Mind map'''s help anyone learn, teach, plan and think more creatively.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Assignment Slide'''
|| Here’s an assignment for you.Choose a topic you know well like, Healthy Eating or Time Management.Create a '''mind map''' using these steps. 

Use keywords, colours and drawings.

Share it with a friend or classmate and compare your maps.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by EduPyramids Educational Services Pvt. Ltd. SIN E, IIT Bombay. Thank you for learning radiantly with us!
|-
|}

Conversational-AI-Tools/C2/Prompt-Engineering/English

2025-11-21T06:25:24Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script: Prompt Engineering''' '''Author: Sudhakar Kumar''' '''Keywords''': prompt, engineering, context, background, few-shot, video tutorial. {|border=1..."

'''Title of the script: Prompt Engineering'''

'''Author: Sudhakar Kumar'''

'''Keywords''': prompt, engineering, context, background, few-shot, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration '''
|-
|| '''Slide 1 '''

'''Title Slide '''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Prompt Engineering'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about
* Prompt engineering
* Importance of context and background
* Few-shot prompting
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using
* Ubuntu Linux OS version 22.04
* Firefox web browser version 141.0.4
* Visual Studio Code version 1.100.3
|-
|| '''Slide 4 '''

'''Pre-requisites '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of:
* Using internet, and
* Programming in C/C++
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.
# '''prompt-engineering.cpp'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''What is Prompt Engineering?'''
|| Let us learn about Prompt engineering.
* It is a skill of writing and refining prompts for AI tools like ChatGPT.
* It means designing clear instructions, questions, or context.
* Good prompts guide the AI tool to give accurate, useful, or creative answers.
|-
|| '''Highlight the address bar in Google Chrome'''
|| Open ChatGPT on any browser.
|-
||
|| Let us give a prompt to ChatGPT.
|-
|| '''Highlight'''

'''Ask anything in the middle of the page'''

'''Type:''' You are a C++ tutor.

Explain the difference between function overloading and function overriding in C++ with examples. Press Enter.
|| You are a C++ tutor. Explain the difference between function overloading and function overriding in C++ with examples.Press Enter.
|-
|| '''Highlight the generated response in the chat window'''
|| ChatGPT first defines function overloading, followed by an example.

Similarly, for function overriding.

Then tabulates the differences between the two.

Note that the content of the response may differ at your end, even with the exact same prompt.
|-
|| '''Highlight compile-time polymorphism in the generated response'''
|| Suppose I am unfamiliar with compile-time polymorphism.

I can ask ChatGPT to provide further explanation.

Highlight this term.

Observe that an option of “Ask ChatGPT” appears.

Click this option and type your query.

I will type, explain this term, and press Enter.

ChatGPT now explains compile-time polymorphism.
|-
|| '''Highlight some terms in the generated response such that the Ask ChatGPT option appears '''
|| “Ask ChatGPT” is a built-in feature of ChatGPT’s web app.

Think of it like a shortcut for quickly asking “What does this mean?”
|-
||
|| Let us try another prompt.
|-
||
|| I am a first-year Computer Science student, and I know the concepts of variables and functions.

I want ChatGPT to explain references in C++.
|-
|| '''Click New Chat '''
|| Click on New chat to open a new chat.
|-
|| '''Type: '''Explain the concept of references in C++ to a first-year CS student who only knows variables and functions. Press Enter.

'''Highlight the few lines of response'''
|| Type the following

And, press Enter.

Observe the response.

ChatGPT explains the concept of references in C++.
|-
||
|| Next, I want to teach the concept of dangling pointers in C with some funny analogy.
|-
|| '''Click New chat'''

'''Type: '''Explain the concept of dangling pointers in C in a way that a beginner can understand, using a funny or relatable real-life analogy.
|| Click New chat to start a new conversation.

In the new chat, type the following.

And, press Enter.
|-
|| '''Highlight the Funny analogy in the generated response'''

'''Scroll and show'''

'''Cursor on previous chat'''
|| See how ChatGPT adds a funny analogy in its response.

All my previous chats appear under Chats in the sidebar.

I can click on any of them to open and continue that conversation.
|-
||
|| Let us now learn about few-shot prompting.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Few-shot Prompting '''
|| If we give ChatGPT a few inputs with examples, it will resolve the issues.

This technique helps the tool recognize patterns and apply them to similar unseen problems.
|-
|| '''Show the code in the visual studio code editor.'''
|| Let us try out a few-shot prompt with an example.

I have a C++ code, and I want ChatGPT to identify the error in a particular format.
|-
|| Type

'''Identify the error in the following C++ code.'''

'''Code:'''

'''int main() {'''

'''int a = "hello";'''

'''return 0;'''

'''}'''

'''Error:'''

'''Assigning a string literal to an int variable is invalid.'''

'''Code:'''

'''int main() {'''

'''cout << "Hello";'''

'''return 0'''

'''}'''

'''Error:'''

'''Missing semicolon after return 0.'''

'''Code:'''

'''int main() {'''

'''int arr[3] = {1, 2, 3, 4};'''

'''return 0;'''

'''}'''

'''Error:'''
|| Go to ChatGPT and start a new chat.

Type the code at the prompt:

And press Enter.
|-
|| '''Highlight Error: in the generated response '''
|| Observe that ChatGPT prints the error with Error semicolon.

Then the error message, followed by an explanation.
|-
||
|| More information on prompt engineering and few-shot prompting, is provided in the Additional Reading Material available on this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt
* Prompt Engineering
* Importance of Context and Background
* Few-shot Prompting
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Assignment '''

Give ChatGPT the same programming question using two scenarios:
# Without role or context, and
# With role and context.

Compare how the answers differ.
|| As an assignment,
|-
|| '''Slide 10'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by '''EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited''', '''SINE, IIT Bombay.'''

Thank you for joining!
|-
|}

Conversational-AI-Tools/C2/Introduction-to-Conversational-AI/English

2025-11-20T13:14:35Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script''': Introduction to Conversational AI '''Author''': Sudhakar Kumar and EduPyramids Team. '''Keywords''': chatgpt, llms, ai, static, dynamic, prompt, v..."

'''Title of the script''': Introduction to Conversational AI

'''Author''': Sudhakar Kumar and EduPyramids Team.

'''Keywords''': chatgpt, llms, ai, static, dynamic, prompt, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide '''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Introduction to Conversational AI'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about:
* Introduction to conversational AI tools
* How AI tools work
* Customizing ChatGPT
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using
* Ubuntu Linux OS version 22.04
* Firefox web browser version 141.0.4
|-
|| '''Slide 4 '''

'''Pre-requisites '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should know
* Basics of using internet, and
* How to frame simple sentences in English
|-
|| '''Slide 5Conversational AI Tools'''
|| Conversational AI software tools:
* They interact with users using natural language through text or voice
* Understanding its intent and give the response
* AI tools are powered and rely on '''Large Language Models''' as its core technology
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''AI Tools'''
|| We will focus on using conversational AI tools to code efficiently.
* I will use ChatGPT throughout this series.
* Learners are welcome to explore other AI tools as well.
|-
||
|| Let us explore the web interface of ChatGPT.
|-
|| '''Open Google Chrome and highlight the address bar'''

'''Type [http://chatgpt.com/ chatgpt.com] and press Enter.'''
|| Open a browser on your computer.

I am using Firefox web browser.

In the address bar, type [http://chatgpt.com/ chatgpt.com] and press Enter.

Log in by entering the required credentials if not done before.

I am already logged in.
|-
|| '''Highlight: various options on the left side panel of the page'''
|| Once I am logged in, various options are available to use.

For example, on the left side panel, options such as New chat, Search chats, Library, and Projects are available.

This is the interface of ChatGPT as of October 2025. However, it may change in the near future.
|-
|| '''Highlight: the user name in the bottom left of the page '''
|| At the bottom left, my username appears, and it says Free as of now.

It means that I am using the Free version of ChatGPT.

I will use the Free version throughout this series.

Note that the free version may have certain limitations, such as message usage caps.

Click on the username to view additional options, including Help, Settings, Personalization, etc.
|-
|| '''Highlight: Settings in the pop-up when clicking on the user name'''
|| Click on '''Settings''' to view the various options available.
|-
|| '''Highlight: Personalization in the left corner of Settings'''
|| Let us click on '''Personalization'''.
|-
|| '''Scroll down in Personalization'''

Nickname: enter your own name.Occupation: Service

Click on Save
|| Here, I can share details like my nickname, occupation, and more.

Pause the tutorial and enter the details as shown.

Click on Save.

Once I do, ChatGPT uses them to personalize its responses for future conversations.
|-
|| '''Highlight: Advanced in the Personalization '''

'''Click the corresponding dropdown'''
|| Scroll down to see the '''Advanced '''option.

Click on the dropdown to see the various fields.
|-
|| '''Highlight: Web search and Code '''
|| By default, web search is enabled.

This lets ChatGPT automatically search the web for answers.
|-
||
|| Let us ask a few questions to see when ChatGPT searches the web.
|-
|| '''Highlight: The X symbol in the left corner'''
|| Close the '''Personalization''' tab.
|-
|| '''Highlight: Ask Anything in the middle of the page'''

'''Type: '''Who is the current prime minister of India? Press Enter.
|| Type the following prompt: Who is the current prime minister of India? And, press Enter.
|-
|| '''Highlight: searching the web message'''
|| Since web search is on, ChatGPT performs a live search while drafting the response.
|-
|| '''Highlight: the generated response in the chat window'''
|| In its response, it says that

The current Prime Minister of India is Narendra Modi.

Note that the content of the response may differ, even if you repeat the same questions.
|-
|| '''Highlight: Wikipedia and other references in the generated response'''
|| ChatGPT also provides link to the websites from which it retrieved this information.
|-
||
|| Let us ask something related to C++ programming.
|-
|| '''Highlight: New chat in the top left'''
|| Click on New chat. A new chat window opens.
|-
|| '''Highlight: Current Prime Minister of India under Chats'''
|| My previous chat appears here at the bottom left corner.
|-
|| '''Highlight: Ask Anything'''

'''Type: '''Explain the difference between std::vector and std::array in C++ with examples. Press Enter.
|| In the new chat, type the following. Explain the difference between std::vector and std::array in C++ with examples.

Press Enter.
|-
|| '''Highlight: '''

'''The generated response'''
|| ChatGPT will not search the web for this.

So, web search is not needed for static knowledge.

For example, programming concepts, historical facts, etc.
|-
|| '''Highlight: '''

'''Current Prime Minister of India under Chats'''
|| On the other hand, web search is needed for dynamic knowledge.

For example, news, stock prices, etc.
|-
||
|| To know more about AI tools and '''ChatGPT,''' refer to the Additional Material available on this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt:
* Introduction to conversational AI tools
* How AI tools work
* Customizing ChatGPT
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial. Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Assignment '''

As an assignment,

Try a few prompts that require dynamic knowledge, with web search on and off.

Observe the difference in the responses.
|| As an assignment, please do the following.
|-
|| '''Slide 9'''

'''Thank you'''
|| This Spoken Tutorial is brought to you by '''EduPyramids Educational Services Private Limited''', '''SINE, IIT Bombay.'''

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

LaTeX/C3/Defining-Colours-and-Environments/English

2025-11-12T11:06:00Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script: Defining Colours and Environments ''' '''Authors: Ambika Vanchinathan''' '''Keywords: '''LaTeX, xcolor package, colorbox, fcolorbox, definecolor, row..."

'''Title of the script: Defining Colours and Environments '''

'''Authors: Ambika Vanchinathan'''

'''Keywords: '''LaTeX, xcolor package, colorbox, fcolorbox, definecolor, rowcolors, RGB, CMYK, HTML color, video tutoria

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Defining Colours and Environments'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Create boxes with colours and borders
* Define custom colors using '''RGB''', '''CMYK''', '''HTML''', and other models and
* Apply colours to table rows
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''

To record this tutorial, I am using:
* '''Linux Mint OS version 21.3'''
* '''TeXworks version 0.6.6'''
|| To record this tutorial I’m using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of''' LaTeX'''.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:

1. '''xcolor-eg.tex'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.

Let us see how to get a framed box with colours.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 27

Run the code

show the output
|| Uncomment line 27.

Run the code.

Output shows a boxed text in yellow and some random text in it.
|-
|| '''Highlight: '''

'''line 27'''
|| The command '''\colorbox '''takes 2 arguments.

The first one is the colour of the box.

And the second one is the text that is inside the box.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 31

Run the code

show the output
|| Uncomment line 31.

Run the code.

Output shows some text enclosed in a box.

The color of the frame is red and

box filled with green colour.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''line 31'''
|| This command creates a framed box.

The command '''\fcolorbox '''takes 3 arguments.

First one is the frame colour.

Second one is the colour to be filled in the box.

Third is the actual text that goes inside the framed box.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 33

Run the code

show the output
|| Uncomment line 33.

Run the code

Output shows another framed box with a black frame filled with lime colour.
|-
||
|| Let us now see how to define new colours.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 35

'''Highlight:'''

'''line 35'''

Point to the defined colour.

Show the options shown as reference,
|| Uncomment line 35.

The command '''\definecolor''' defines a new colour.

It takes 3 arguments.

1. name of the new colour to be defined

2. model – '''rgb, cmyk''' etc.

3. colour definition – Each number shows how much red, green, and blue are mixed to get a new color.

Here we have defined a colour called '''myOrange''' in rgb model .

Complete options are given at the end of the '''TeX''' file for reference.
|-
||
|| Let us apply the newly defined '''myOrange '''colour to the text.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 37

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 37

Run the code

Output shows the text in '''myOrange''' colour from the section heading onwards.
|-
||
|| Let’s see how to colour the rows in the table.
|-
|| Comment line 4

Uncomment the line 41, 5

Run the code and show the output
|| Comment line 4.

Uncomment lines 5 and 41.

Run the code.

The output shows the table rows in yellow and lime colour.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''lines 41, 5'''
|| The command '''\rowcolors''' painted the rows in the table.

We also need to load the package''' xcolor''' with''' [table]''' option to use this command.

The '''\rowcolors''' command takes 3 arguments:

1. The row number from which coloring should begin

2. color for odd-numbered rows

3. color for even-numbered rows

Here, it starts colouring from row 1.

Odd rows are colored in yellow and even rows in lime colour.
|-
|| Point to the table.
|| Let us see how changing the starting row number affects the coloring.
|-
|| Comment the line 41

Uncomment the line 43

Run the code and show the output
|| Comment line 41

Uncomment line 43.

Run the code.

Output shows colouring of the rows starting from the second row.
|-
|| Highlight line 43
|| Here the''' \rowcolors '''command is defined with argument 2.

This means the coloring starts from row two.

The first row is not coloured.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt:
* Creating boxes with colours and borders
* Defining custom colors using RGB, CMYK, HTML, and other models
* Applying colours to table rows
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment,

Define a new colour maroon using the '''RGB''' model mixing as (0.9, 0, 0).

Use it as text colour of the document
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| Thank you for joining
|-
|}

LaTeX/C3/Adding-Colour-to-LaTeX-Documents/English

2025-11-12T06:48:19Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script: Adding Colour to LaTeX Documents''' '''Authors: Ambika Vanchinathan''' '''Keywords:''' LaTeX, xcolor package, background color, textcolor, pagecolor,..."

'''Title of the script: Adding Colour to LaTeX Documents'''

'''Authors: Ambika Vanchinathan'''

'''Keywords:''' LaTeX, xcolor package, background color, textcolor, pagecolor, nopagecolor, fcolorbox, video tutorial

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on ''' Adding Colour to LaTeX Documents.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to
* Use the '''xcolor''' package
* Apply colour to text and page background
* Colour a specific text and
* Colour Math equations
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''

To record this tutorial, I am using:
* Linux Mint OS version 21.3
* TeXworks Editor version 0.6.6
|| To record this tutorial I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of LaTeX.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:

1. xcolor-eg.tex

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Highlight :'''

\usepackage{xcolor}
|| This command imports the '''xcolor''' package.
|-
|| Click the green Typeset button to run the code

Use '''XeLatex '''to typeset.

Show the output
|| Click the green '''Typeset''' button to run the code.

The output shows text, table and math equation in black colour.

Let us add colour to the text.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 11

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 11.

Run the code

Output shows text, math equation and section heading in blue colour.
|-
|| '''Highlight :'''

line 11
|| To colour the text, we use the '''\color{} '''command.

'''color''' command takes the color name as its argument.

Here we have given blue.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 13

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 13.

Run the code.

Output shows text and section title in lime colour.
|-
||

'''Highlight :'''

'''line 13'''

click the typeset button

Show the output
|| This command changes the colour to lime.

The previous line remains in blue colour.

This command takes effect for all the text from here onwards.

Let us see how to change the background colour.
|-
|| uncomment the line 15

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 15.

Run the code.

Output shows gray coloured background for the entire document.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 15
|| '''\pagecolor''' command changes the background colour of the page.

This command takes the colour name as its argument.

Here it is specified as gray.

Let us see some more options.
|-
|| uncomment line 17

Run the code

show the output
|| Uncomment line 17.

Run the code

We see some text in violet colour in the output.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 17
|| The command '''\textcolor''' takes 2 arguments.

The first one is color''' '''and the second one is the''' '''actual text to apply the color.

Here violet is chosen for the given text.

Scope of the '''textcolor''' command is only for the text that is within the braces.

So, the text outside the braces will be in its original colour.
|-
|| point to the output in lime colour
|| Here it is shown in lime colour.

Let us see how to remove the background colour of the page.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 19

Run the code

show the output
|| Uncomment line 19.

Run the code.

Now we see that the background colour is removed in the output.
|-
|| '''Highlight: line 19'''
|| '''\nopagecolor''' command removes the page colour or gives no pagecolor to the background.

This takes effect from the current page.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 21, 25

Run the code

show the output
|| Uncomment lines 21 and 25.

Run the code.

The output shows the text colour changing to teal.
|-
|| '''Highlight: line 21'''
|| Here we have changed the text colour to teal.
|-
|| show the output
|| The math equation has also changed to teal colour.
|-
|| '''Highlight: '''

line 21, 23
|| '''\color{teal } '''command has changed the text and math equation to teal colour.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* Use the '''xcolor''' package
* Apply colour to text and page background
* Colour a specific text and
* Colour Math equations
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''
|| As an Assignment,

Create a page with background colour blue and text in white colour.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| Thank you for joining
|-
|}

LaTeX/C3/Typesetting-Text-in-Multiple-Columns/English

2025-11-11T07:33:56Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title of the Script:''' '''Typesetting Text in Multiple Columns'''

'''Author: Ambika Vanchinathan'''

'''Keywords:''' LaTeX,  multicols, columnbreak, column seprule,  multicols*, column seprulecolor,  two-column, video tutorial

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Typesetting Text in Multiple Columns.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to
* Create multi-column text layouts
* Add and customize column separation lines
* Implement unbalanced columns using '''multicols*'''
* Insert manual column breaks
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''

To record this tutorial, I am using:
* '''Linux Mint OS v21.3'''
* '''Texworks v0.6.6'''
|| To record this tutorial I’m using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of LaTeX.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:

'''1. multicols-eg.tex'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Highlight:''' Line 5

'''\usepackage{multicol}'''
|| This command imports the multicol package.It allows us to typeset text in multiple columns within a page.
|-
|| '''Highlight:''' Line 14

'''{mutlicols}'''

'''Highlight:''' lines 14 to 17

'''Highlight: \section'''

Point to the parameters and the optional bracket
|| The '''multicols''' environment accepts two parameters:
* The number of columns (up to 10)
* An optional header text

Here, we used''' \section '''command and a paragraph inside the optional brackets.
|-
|| Click the green Typeset button and show the output
|| Click the green '''Typeset''' button to run the code.

Here is the output.

The text in the document is typeset using the multicols environment as:
* a single paragraph,
* two columns and
* three columns simultaneously
|-
|| Uncomment the line 8
|| Let’s uncomment line 8.
|-
|| '''Highlight:''' Line 8
|| '''\columnseprule''' separates the columns using lines.
|-
|| Run the code and show the outputPoint the cursor on black column separation lines.
|| Let’s run the code

The output shows column separation lines in black.
|-
|| Uncomment the lines 6, 9
|| Uncomment lines 6 and 9.
|-
|| '''Highlight:

'''Line 9'''

'''\def\columnseprulecolor{\color{red}}'''

'''\usepackage{color}'''
|| This command generates the column separation lines in red colour.

We have loaded the '''\usepackage{color}''' in the preamble.
|-
|| Run the code and show the output
|| Run the code.

We can see that the colour of the lines has changed to red.
|-
|| Change '''{3}''' to '''{5}''' in line 28.

Run the code
|| Change {3} to {5} in line 28

Run the codeWe see five columns instead of 3 columns.
|-
|| Change 5 to 3 in line 28

Run the code
|| Revert back to 3 in line 28

Run the codeIt is now back to the original 3 columns
|-
|| Comment the lines 28, 41

Uncomment the lines 29, 40
|| Comment lines 28 and 41.

Uncomment lines 29 and 40.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

Lines 29, 40

'''Highlight:'''

line 14.
|| '''multicols*''' environment fills each column completely.

Here columns are not adjusted to the same height.

Whereas, '''multicols''' environment fills all the columns simultaneously to the same height.
|-
|| Run the code and show the output
|| Run the code.

The output shows that the columns are not filled to the same height.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 33

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 33

Run the code to see the output.
|-
|| '''Highlight:''' line 33
|| '''\columnbreak''' forces text to break manually at that point.

The text continues in the next column.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to
* Create multi-column text layouts
* Add and customize column separation lines
* Implement unbalanced columns using '''multicols*'''
* Insert manual column breaks
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''

Create a document with
* One 2-column section with a header
* One 3-column section without a header
* Colour the separation lines using the color of your choice.
|| As an '''Assignment''', please do the following
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| Thank you for joining
|-
|}

LaTeX/C3/Typesetting-Text-in-Multiple-Columns/English

2025-11-11T07:32:27Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script:''' '''Typesetting Text in Multiple Columns''' '''Author: Ambika Vanchinathan''' '''Keywords:''' LaTeX,  multicols, columnbreak, column seprule,&nb..."

'''Title of the Script:''' '''Typesetting Text in Multiple Columns'''
'''Author: Ambika Vanchinathan'''
'''Keywords:''' LaTeX,  multicols, columnbreak, column seprule,  multicols*, column seprulecolor,  two-column, video tutorial

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Typesetting Text in Multiple Columns.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to
* Create multi-column text layouts
* Add and customize column separation lines
* Implement unbalanced columns using '''multicols*'''
* Insert manual column breaks
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''

To record this tutorial, I am using:
* '''Linux Mint OS v21.3'''
* '''Texworks v0.6.6'''
|| To record this tutorial I’m using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of LaTeX.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:

'''1. multicols-eg.tex'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Highlight:''' Line 5

'''\usepackage{multicol}'''
|| This command imports the multicol package.It allows us to typeset text in multiple columns within a page.
|-
|| '''Highlight:''' Line 14

'''{mutlicols}'''

'''Highlight:''' lines 14 to 17

'''Highlight: \section'''

Point to the parameters and the optional bracket
|| The '''multicols''' environment accepts two parameters:
* The number of columns (up to 10)
* An optional header text

Here, we used''' \section '''command and a paragraph inside the optional brackets.
|-
|| Click the green Typeset button and show the output
|| Click the green '''Typeset''' button to run the code.

Here is the output.

The text in the document is typeset using the multicols environment as:
* a single paragraph,
* two columns and
* three columns simultaneously
|-
|| Uncomment the line 8
|| Let’s uncomment line 8.
|-
|| '''Highlight:''' Line 8
|| '''\columnseprule''' separates the columns using lines.
|-
|| Run the code and show the outputPoint the cursor on black column separation lines.
|| Let’s run the code

The output shows column separation lines in black.
|-
|| Uncomment the lines 6, 9
|| Uncomment lines 6 and 9.
|-
|| '''Highlight:

'''Line 9'''

'''\def\columnseprulecolor{\color{red}}'''

'''\usepackage{color}'''
|| This command generates the column separation lines in red colour.

We have loaded the '''\usepackage{color}''' in the preamble.
|-
|| Run the code and show the output
|| Run the code.

We can see that the colour of the lines has changed to red.
|-
|| Change '''{3}''' to '''{5}''' in line 28.

Run the code
|| Change {3} to {5} in line 28

Run the codeWe see five columns instead of 3 columns.
|-
|| Change 5 to 3 in line 28

Run the code
|| Revert back to 3 in line 28

Run the codeIt is now back to the original 3 columns
|-
|| Comment the lines 28, 41

Uncomment the lines 29, 40
|| Comment lines 28 and 41.

Uncomment lines 29 and 40.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

Lines 29, 40

'''Highlight:'''

line 14.
|| '''multicols*''' environment fills each column completely.

Here columns are not adjusted to the same height.

Whereas, '''multicols''' environment fills all the columns simultaneously to the same height.
|-
|| Run the code and show the output
|| Run the code.

The output shows that the columns are not filled to the same height.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 33

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 33

Run the code to see the output.
|-
|| '''Highlight:''' line 33
|| '''\columnbreak''' forces text to break manually at that point.

The text continues in the next column.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''
In this tutorial, we have learnt to
* Create multi-column text layouts
* Add and customize column separation lines
* Implement unbalanced columns using '''multicols*'''
* Insert manual column breaks
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''

Create a document with
* One 2-column section with a header
* One 3-column section without a header
* Colour the separation lines using the color of your choice.
|| As an '''Assignment''', please do the following
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| Thank you for joining
|-
|}

LaTeX/C3/Framing-texts-and-Fancybox/English

2025-11-10T05:56:19Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: Framing texts and Fancybox''' '''Author: Ambika Vanchinathan''' '''Keywords: '''LaTeX, fancybox, shadowbox, doublebox, ovalbox, Ovalbox, fbox, video..."

'''Title of the Script: Framing texts and Fancybox'''

'''Author: Ambika Vanchinathan'''

'''Keywords: '''LaTeX, fancybox, shadowbox, doublebox, ovalbox, Ovalbox, fbox, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken tutorial on '''Framing Texts and Fancybox.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial , we will learn to
* Use the fancybox package
* Add a frame using shadowbox, doublebox, ovalbox, and fbox
* Frame the text paragraphs and
* Add a frame to the single and multiline equations
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''

To record this tutorial, I am using:
* Linux Mint version 21.3
* Texworks version 0.6.6
|| To record this tutorial I’m using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of LaTeX
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:

1. fancybox-eg.tex

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''Line 4'''

'''\usepackage{fancybox}'''

'''{fancybox}'''
|| '''\usepackage{fancybox}''' imports the '''fancybox''' '''package'''.

'''fancybox''' allows us to create decorative boxes around text or images.

Boxes can have shadows, double lines, or rounded corners.

They can be used for highlighting important sections, notes, or headings.

This makes the content visually appealing.
|-
|| Click the '''Green Typeset '''button to run the code.

Select XeLaTeX from the drop down
|| Let us run the code to see the output.
|-
|| Uncomment line 31
|| Uncomment line 31.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 31
|| The command '''\shadowbox '''creates a box with a shadow effect around the given text
|-
|| Click the green Typeset button and show the output
|| Let’s run the code.

Here is the output.
|-
|| Uncomment the line 35
|| Uncomment line 35.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 35
|| The command '''\doublebox''' creates a double lined box around the given text.
|-
|| Click the green Typeset button and show the output
|| Let’s run the code.

The output shows a double lined box around the text.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 40
|| The command '''\ovalbox '''creates an oval box around the given text
|-
|| Uncomment line 40

Click the green Typeset button and show the output
|| Uncomment line 40.

Let us run the code

Here is the output
|-
|| Uncomment line 44

Click the green Typeset button and show the output
|| Uncomment line 44.

Let us run the code.

Here is the output.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 44
|| The command \'''Ovalbox''' creates a thick oval box around the given text.

Observe the capital '''O '''in the command.
|-
|| Comment line 46

Uncomment line 55

Click the green Typeset button and show the output

Point to the paragraph text.
|| Now, let us add a minipage about '''fancybox'''.

Comment line 46

Uncomment line 55

Let us run the code

Output shows a paragraph text.

Let us add a box around this paragraph.
|-
|| Uncomment lines 48 and 52
|| Uncomment lines 48 and 52.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

lines 48 to 52
|| The \fbox command draws a box around the contents of the minipage.

This command allows us to frame multiple paragraphs.
|-
|| Run the code
|| Let us run the code.

The output now shows a box around the mini paragraph text.
|-
|| Comment line 55

Uncomment line 61
|| Comment line 55.

Uncomment line 61.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

lines 57 to 59
|| Observe the '''$ '''inside''' \fbox command.'''

'''$...$ '''is''' '''used to show the equation in math mode.

The \'''fbox''' command creates a box around the equation.
|-
|| Click the green Typeset button and show the output
|| Let us run the code.

Here, only a single line of the equation can be enclosed in a frame.
|-
|| Comment line 61

Uncomment line 74
|| Comment line 61

Uncomment line 74
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

lines 63 to 71

'''\begin{equation}'''

'''\fbox{$'''

'''\begin{array}{rcl}'''

'''a&=&b+c\\'''

'''<nowiki>=&x+y\\</nowiki>'''

'''<nowiki>=&z</nowiki>'''

'''\end{array}'''

'''$}'''

'''\end{equation'''
|| The command '''\fbox '''is used with an '''array''' environment.

This creates a box around multiple equations.

So a multiple lined equation is framed using an '''array '''inside the '''\fbox '''command .
|-
|| Click the green Typeset button and show the output
|| Let us run the code.

Here is the output.

A frame is added around the multiple lined equation.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to
* Use the fancybox package
* Add a frame using shadowbox, doublebox, ovalbox, and fbox
* Frame the text paragraphs
* Add a frame to the single and multiline equations
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''

As an '''Assignment'''
|| As an Assignment,

Create a section called '''Algebra Practice'''
* Use '''\shadowbox '''for headings like '''Solve the following equations'''
* Use''' \ovalbox '''for short tips or reminders
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| Thank you for joining
|-
|}

FreeCAD/C3/Working-with-Imported-STEP-Files/English

2025-10-16T06:45:56Z

Ketkinaina:

'''Title of the script : Working with Imported STEP Files in FreeCAD'''

'''Author: Jakub Michalski and Chitra Balaji'''

'''Keywords :''' FreeCAD, 3D drawing, Import, Defeaturing, pocket, Video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Working with Imported STEP Files''' in '''FreeCAD.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Import a''' STEP''' file in '''FreeCAD'''
* Understand why '''File''' '''Import''' is preferred over '''Open''' option.
* Use the '''Defeaturing''' tool to remove unwanted features.
* Create a '''sketch '''and make a''' Pocket '''in the model.
|-
|| '''Slide 3 '''

'''System Requirements'''

To record this tutorial, I am using:
* '''Windows 11'''
* '''FreeCAD version 1.0.0'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4 '''

'''Prerequisite'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should know the basics of '''FreeCAD '''interface.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files'''

The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.
# '''Pin.step'''
# '''Hole.step'''
# '''Example.step'''
# '''Sample.step'''

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| Right click on the Freecad app image, Select '''Run'''.
|| Let’s open the '''FreeCAD''' interface.
|-
|| Click on the New(+) icon.
|| Let us open a new file.
|-
|| Narration

Click on the File menu and select the Open menu option.

Select a step file.

Click open.
|| We can open the '''STEP''' file using either Open or Import options.

Lets open a step file.
|-
|| STEP Import Options dialog box opens.

Tick the''' Enable STEP compound merge '''and '''Import invisible objects.'''

Then click OK in the dialog box.
|| After clicking the Open button, the STEP dialog box opens

Check the check boxes for:

'''Enable STEP compound merge '''and '''Import invisible objects.'''

Let us leave the other check boxes as default.

Click the '''OK''' button in the dialog box to proceed.
|-
|| Click on the File menu and select the Open menu option.

Select a step file.

Click open.

Show the tabs in the bottom.

Switch to first tab.
|| Let's open another step file.

'''Open''' option loads the file in a new tab.
|-
|| Narration

Narration

Click on the File menu and select the Import menu option.

Select a step file.

Click open.

Click the imported part and select the move tool.

Enter the value and click enter.
|| The '''Import '''option''' '''is preferred when you want to combine several files together.

Let’s import a step file.

We can see that the step file is imported in the already existing model.

We can also move the models.
|-
|| Go to '''File''' and click '''New'''.
|| Let us open a new file.
|-
|| Go to''' File''' menu and Select '''Import''' menu option.

Point to the Import file dialog box.

Select the '''Example.step''' file from the Code files folder.

Click on the''' Open '''button at the bottom right corner.
|| Now let’s import a step file and edit the model.

Let’s go to''' File '''and select '''Import.'''

'''Import File '''dialog box opens.

Select the '''Example.step''' file.

Click the '''Open''' button in the dialog box.
|-
|| STEP Import Options dialog box opens.

Then click OK in the dialog box.
|| While importing, the '''STEP''' dialog box opens.

Click OK.
|-
|| Model tree shows imported part.

Cursor on the model.

Narration

Narration
|| The imported part now appears in the 3D view and in the '''Model''' tree.

A''' STEP''' file is a standard 3D model format.

It allows to import designs from other '''CAD''' software and edit them in '''FreeCAD'''.

We can edit this imported step file in different workbenches.
|-
|| Switch to Part workbench.
|| Let's switch to the''' Part '''workbench.
|-
|| Select the top face of the projected box

Select the defeaturing tool.

Move the cursor and highlight it.
|| Let’s now remove a part or face in the given model.

Select the top face and side face of the projected box.

Select the '''Defeaturing''' tool.

You can see that the selected part is removed now.
|-
|| Show the new copy of the object that appears in the model tree.

Move the cursor to show the original object.

Highlight the booleans operations.
|| A new copy of the part is created after removing the selected features.

Note that the original object is still seen in the tree.

The part operations like Booleans can also be applied to '''STEP''' files directly.
|-
|| Switch to Part Design workbench
|| Now let us create a pocket in the model.

For this we will switch to the''' Part Design''' workbench.
|-
|| Select defeatured part.Click''' Create body '''tool on the toolbar.

Move the cursor to show the base feature in model tree.
|| Select the defeatured object.Then click '''Create''' '''Body''' tool.

The defeatured object becomes the BaseFeature of the Body.
|-
|| Select the create a datum plane tool.

Select the top face.

Click OK.

In the reference pop up, select the Make independent copy and click OK.
|| Select the '''create a datum plane''' tool.

A new datum plane is created to draw on the top face.

Select the top face and click '''OK'''.
|-
|| Select Create Sketch tool.
|| Click '''Create Sketch tool.'''
|-
|| Narration

Select the circle tool in sketcher

Close the sketch
|| In Sketcher, let us draw the pocket profile.

Select the circle tool and draw a circle on the top face.Close the sketch.
|-
|| Highlight the '''Pocket '''tool in sketch
|| Select the sketch and the '''Pocket '''tool.
|-
|| Enter the depth as 10mm
|| Enter the depth as 10 mm.Then click OK.
|-
|| 3D view showing pocket cut into the defeatured part
|| The pocket is now created in the defeatured part.
|-
|| Go to File → Save As

Enter the file name as '''Edited example''' and click OK.
|| To save the file, go to '''File '''and click '''Save'''.

Enter the file name as '''Edited example''' and click Save.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial we learnt to
* Import a''' STEP''' file in '''FreeCAD'''
* Understand why File '''Import''' is preferred over '''Open '''option.
* Use the '''Defeaturing''' tool to remove unwanted features.
* Create a '''sketch '''and make a''' pocket''' in the model.
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
|| '''Slide 6 '''

'''Assignment'''
* Import a '''Sample.step''' file into '''FreeCAD.'''
* '''Defeature''' it by removing both the rectangle protrusions.
* Add a''' Body''' and '''BaseFeature.'''
* Create a circular''' sketch''' on a face and '''pocket '''it by 10 mm.
|| As an assignment, please do the following:

Here is the output of the assignment.
|-
|| '''Slide 7 '''

'''Thank You'''
|| Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

FreeCAD/C3/Working-with-Imported-STEP-Files/English

2025-10-16T05:57:45Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script : Working with Imported STEP Files in FreeCAD''' '''Author: Jakub Michalski and Chitra Balaji''' '''Keywords :''' FreeCAD, 3D drawing, Import, Defeatu..."

'''Title of the script : Working with Imported STEP Files in FreeCAD'''

'''Author: Jakub Michalski and Chitra Balaji'''

'''Keywords :''' FreeCAD, 3D drawing, Import, Defeaturing, pocket, Video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Working with Imported STEP Files''' in '''FreeCAD.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to:
* Import a''' STEP''' file in '''FreeCAD'''
* Understand why '''File''' '''Import''' is preferred over '''Open''' option.
* Use the '''Defeaturing''' tool to remove unwanted features.
* Create a '''sketch '''and make a''' Pocket '''in the model.
|-
|| '''Slide 3 '''

'''System Requirements'''

To record this tutorial, I am using:
* '''Windows 11'''
* '''FreeCAD version 1.0.0'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4 '''

'''Prerequisite'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should know the basics of '''FreeCAD '''interface.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code Files'''

The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.
# '''Pin.step'''
# '''Hole.step'''
# '''Example.step'''
# '''Sample.step'''

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|-
|| Right click on the Freecad app image, Select '''Run'''.
|| Let’s open the '''FreeCAD''' interface.
|-
|| Click on the New(+) icon.
|| Let us open a new file.
|-
|| Narration

Click on the File menu and select the Open menu option.

Select a step file.

Click open.
|| We can open the '''STEP''' file using either Open or Import options.

Lets open a step file.
|-
|| STEP Import Options dialog box opens.

Tick the''' Enable STEP compound merge '''and '''Import invisible objects.'''

Then click OK in the dialog box.
|| After clicking the Open button, the STEP dialog box opens

Check the check boxes for:

'''Enable STEP compound merge '''and '''Import invisible objects.'''

Let us leave the other check boxes as default.

Click the '''OK''' button in the dialog box to proceed.
|-
|| Click on the File menu and select the Open menu option.

Select a step file.

Click open.

Show the tabs in the bottom.

Switch to first tab.
|| Let's open another step file.

'''Open''' option loads the file in a new tab.
|-
|| Narration

Narration

Click on the File menu and select the Import menu option.

Select a step file.

Click open.

Click the imported part and select the move tool.

Enter the value and click enter.
|| The '''Import '''option''' '''is preferred when you want to combine several files together.

Let’s import a step file.

We can see that the step file is imported in the already existing model.

We can also move the models.
|-
|| Go to '''File''' and click '''New'''.
|| Let us open a new file.
|-
|| Go to''' File''' menu and Select '''Import''' menu option.

Point to the Import file dialog box.

Select the '''Example.step''' file from the Code files folder.

Click on the''' Open '''button at the bottom right corner.
|| Now let’s import a step file and edit the model.

Let’s go to''' File '''and select '''Import.'''

'''Import File '''dialog box opens.

Select the '''Example.step''' file.

Click the '''Open''' button in the dialog box.
|-
|| STEP Import Options dialog box opens.

Then click OK in the dialog box.
|| While importing, the '''STEP''' dialog box opens.

Click OK.
|-
|| Model tree shows imported part.

Cursor on the model.

Narration

Narration
|| The imported part now appears in the 3D view and in the '''Model''' tree.

A''' STEP''' file is a standard 3D model format.

It allows to import designs from other '''CAD''' software and edit them in '''FreeCAD'''.

We can edit this imported step file in different workbenches.
|-
|| Switch to Part workbench.
|| Let's switch to the''' Part '''workbench.
|-
|| Select the top face of the projected box

Select the defeaturing tool.

Move the cursor and highlight it.
|| Let’s now remove a part or face in the given model.

Select the top face and side face of the projected box.

Select the '''Defeaturing''' tool.

You can see that the selected part is removed now.
|-
|| Show the new copy of the object that appears in the model tree.

Move the cursor to show the original object.

Highlight the booleans operations.
|| A new copy of the part is created after removing the selected features.

Note that the original object is still seen in the tree.

The part operations like Booleans can also be applied to '''STEP''' files directly.
|-
|| Switch to Part Design workbench
|| Now let us create a pocket in the model.

For this we will switch to the''' Part Design''' workbench.
|-
|| Select defeatured part.Click''' Create body '''tool on the toolbar.

Move the cursor to show the base feature in model tree.
|| Select the defeatured object.Then click '''Create''' '''Body''' tool.

The defeatured object becomes the BaseFeature of the Body.
|-
|| Select the create a datum plane tool.

Select the top face.

Click OK.

In the reference pop up, select the Make independent copy and click OK.
|| Select the '''create a datum plane''' tool.

A new datum plane is created to draw on the top face.

Select the top face and click '''OK'''.
|-
|| Select Create Sketch tool.
|| Click '''Create Sketch tool.'''
|-
|| Narration

Select the circle tool in sketcher

Close the sketch
|| In Sketcher, let us draw the pocket profile.

Select the circle tool and draw a circle on the top face.Close the sketch.
|-
|| Highlight the '''Pocket '''tool in sketch
|| Select the sketch and the '''Pocket '''tool.
|-
|| Enter the depth as 10mm
|| Enter the depth as 10 mm.Then click OK.
|-
|| 3D view showing pocket cut into the defeatured part
|| The pocket is now created in the defeatured part.
|-
|| Go to File → Save As

Enter the file name as '''Edited example''' and click OK.
|| To save the file, go to '''File '''and click '''Save'''.

Enter the file name as '''Edited example''' and click Save.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial we learnt to
* Import a''' STEP''' file in '''FreeCAD'''
* Understand why File '''Import''' is preferred over '''Open '''option.
* Use the '''Defeaturing''' tool to remove unwanted features.
* Create a '''sketch '''and make a''' pocket''' in the model.
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarize.
|-
|| '''Slide 6 '''

'''Assignment'''
* Import a '''Sample.step''' file into '''FreeCAD.'''
* '''Defeature''' it by removing both the rectangle protrusions.
* Add a''' Body''' and '''BaseFeature.'''
* Create a circular''' sketch''' on a face and '''pocket '''it by 10 mm.
* The final output''' Edited Sample.png''' is provided in code files.
|| As an assignment, please do the following:

Here is the output of the assignment.
|-
|| '''Slide 7 '''

'''Thank You'''
|| Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

LaTeX/C3/Wrap-Text-Around-an-Image/English

2025-10-15T08:53:24Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script: Wrap Text Around an Image.''' '''Authors: Ambika Vanchinathan''' '''Keywords:''' LaTeX, wrapfig, wrapfigure, text wrapping, figure placement, floatin..."

'''Title of the script: Wrap Text Around an Image.'''

'''Authors: Ambika Vanchinathan'''

'''Keywords:''' LaTeX, wrapfig, wrapfigure, text wrapping, figure placement, floating figures, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this spoken tutorial on ''' Wrap Text Around an Image.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to
* Use the '''wrapfig''' package
* Write the syntax and set placement in '''wrapfigure'''
* Adjust the width and spacing between the image and text
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''

To record this tutorial, I am using:
* Linux Mint OS version 21.3
* TeXworks Editor version 0.6.6
|| To record this tutorial, I am using the following setup.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of LaTeX
|-
|| '''Slide 5: '''

'''Code files'''

The following code files are required to practice this tutorial:

1. wrapfig-eg.tex

2. Free-Stock-Photos.jpg

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the '''Code Files''' link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us get started
|-
|| '''Highlight :'''

'''\usepackage{wrapfig}'''

'''\usepackage{graphicx}'''
|| The''' wrapfig '''package allows text to wrap around the figures.

We load the '''graphicx '''package to include images in our document.
|-
|| Click the green Typeset button

Show the output
|| Click the green Typeset button to run the code.

Output shows images placed normally with some white space around them.

Let us see wrapping text around the figures.
|-
|| '''Uncomment the lines 12, 14, 35, 41'''

Run the code

Show the output
|| Uncomment the lines 12, 14, 35, and 41

Run the code.

We see the '''text wrapped '''around the figures

Let us see how the code works.
|-
|| '''Highlight :'''

'''lines 12 to 14'''
|| The environment '''wrapfigure''' is used to wrap the text around the figure.

'''Wrapfigure''' environment has 2 arguments in line 12.

The argument '''{r}''' next to '''wrapfigure''' is used to position the figure to the right.

Next argument '''{.4\textwidth}''' specifies the allotted width for the figure.

The text will be wrapped around this width.

Note that \'''includegraphics '''command is inside the '''wrapfigure''' environment.
|-
|| '''Highlight :'''

'''lines 35, 39, 41'''
|| Here '''{L} '''positions the figure to the left side.

'''Width '''is '''.6\textwidth.'''

The output shows one figure on the right and the other on the left side.
|-
||
|| Let us see the width specifications in detail.
|-
|| Comment the line 35

Uncomment the line 36

Run the code and show the output
|| Comment line 35.

Uncomment line 36.

Run the code

Here is the output of the code.

We see some white space to the right of the second figure.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''line 36, 39'''
|| Here the width of the actual figure '''(.6\textwidth) '''is much smaller than the allotted wrapfigure width '''(.8\textwidth)'''.

So, we see the white space
|-
|| Comment the line 36

Uncomment the line 37

Run the code and show the output
|| Comment the line 36

Uncomment line 37.

Run the code.

Output shows, figure''' '''is''' '''overwritten by text.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''line 37, 39'''

click the typeset button and show the output
|| Here the width of the actual figure '''(.6\textwidth) '''is bigger than the allotted '''wrap figure''' width '''(.4\textwidth)'''.

So we get the undesirable output.

It is important to allocate proper space for wrapping based on the figure’s width.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt how to:
* Use the wrapfig package
* Write the syntax and set placement in wrapfigure
* Adjust the width and spacing between the image and text
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''
|| As an '''Assignment'''
* Insert an image on the right side with a specified width and
* Wrap the text around it.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| Thank you for joining
|-
|}

LaTeX/C3/Adding-a-Watermark-to-a-Document/English

2025-10-15T07:47:26Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: Adding a Watermark to a Document''' '''Author: Ambika Vanchinathan''' '''Keywords: '''LaTeX, Draftwatermark, watermark text, customized watermark, st..."

'''Title of the Script: Adding a Watermark to a Document'''

'''Author: Ambika Vanchinathan'''

'''Keywords: '''LaTeX, Draftwatermark, watermark text, customized watermark, stamp, hpos, vpos, angle, color, text, DraftWatermarkOptions, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Adding a Watermark to a Document'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to,
* Create and customize watermarks using the draftwatermark package
* Control watermark visibility on specific pages
* Use the eso-pic package for watermarking over the images
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using:
* Linux Mint OS version 21.3
* Texworks version 0.6.6
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of LaTeX.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code files are required to practice this tutorial:

1. draftwatermark-eg.tex

2. Free-Stock-Photos.jpg
|| The following code files are required to practice this tutorial.

These files are provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''\usepackage{draftwatermark}'''
|| This command imports the draftwatermark package.
|-
|| Select '''XeLaTeX typesetting '''option from the dropdown.

Click the green Typeset button and show the output
|| Select '''XeLaTeX '''and click the green Typeset button to run the code.

Here is the output

Default watermark '''DRAFT''' is printed across all the pages
|-
|| '''Comment line 7'''

'''uncomment line 8'''

Run the code and show the output
|| Let us comment line 7 and

uncomment line 8

Let’s run the code

The''' watermark''' is printed only on the first''' '''page.
|-
|| '''Comment line 8'''

'''uncomment line 7, 12'''

Run the code

'''Highlight:'''

'''line 12'''
|| Comment line 8.

uncomment lines 7 and 12.

Run the code

Watermark '''Draftcopy '''is printed across all the pages.

Observe the options given in the \'''DraftwatermarkOptions '''command.
|-
|| '''Comment line 12'''

'''uncomment line 27'''

Run the code and show the output

Cursor on the '''text''' keyword.

Cursor on the changed watermark.
|| Comment line 12.

uncomment line 27.

Run the code

'''text '''keyword''' '''in the command changes the watermark text.

Here the watermark changes to '''Sample.'''
|-
|| '''uncomment line 28'''

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 28 and run the code.

'''color '''keyword''' '''changes the''' '''watermark colour

Here it changes to '''blue'''

We can also use values like '''[gray]{0.5} '''or '''[rgb]{1, 0, 1}.'''

That is by '''name '''and its '''strength '''or with the '''rgb '''option.

For that we have to load \'''usepackage{xcolor}''' in the preamble.
|-
|| '''uncomment line 29'''

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 29

Run the code

'''fontsize '''keyword changes the watermark’s '''fontsize.'''
|-
|| '''uncomment line 30'''

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 30

Run the code

Here is the output

'''hpos''' keyword

changes the horizontal position''' '''of the watermark.
|-
|| '''uncomment line 31'''

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 31

Run the code

Here is the output

'''vpos '''keyword changes the''' '''vertical position''' '''of the watermark.
|-
|| '''uncomment line 32'''

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 32

Run the code.

'''angle '''keyword in '''the command '''changes the angle''' '''of the watermark

Here it changes to 60''' degrees.'''
|-
|| '''uncomment line 33'''

Run the code and show the output
|| Uncomment line 33

Run the code

'''Stamp '''keyword is set to '''true''' or '''false.'''

Here '''false '''makes the watermark vanish from all the pages.
|-
|| '''Comment line 33, 32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27'''

'''uncomment line 34'''

Run the code and show the output

'''Highlight:'''

'''Highlight lines 27 to 33 '''and then '''Highlight line 34.'''

Highlight the text EduPyramids in the code.
|| Comment the lines 27 to 33.

Uncomment the line 34

Run the code.

Notice that all the options are given in a single line of code.

Here watermarking text is EduPyramids.
|-
||
|| So far, the watermark has only appeared on the pages, but not on top of the image.

Now, let us see how to get the watermark on top of the image too.
|-
|| '''Comment the lines 34 and 7'''
|| Comment the lines 34 and 7
|-
|| '''Uncomment the lines from 36 to 48'''
|| Uncomment the lines from 36 to 48
|-
|| '''Highlight line 36'''

'''Highlight lines 37 to 43'''

'''Highlight Line 46'''
|| In line 36, we load the eso-pic package.

We use this package to get a watermark on top of the images.

In lines 37 to 43 we define a new command called '''MyWatermark'''.

This command defines the watermark’s text colour to blue and the text to '''Confidential'''.

Line 46 instructs the compiler to ship out every page with the watermark on foreground
|-
|| Let’s run the code to see the output.

Cursor on the Output
|| Let us run the code

Now we see the watermark on the image too

Watermarking it with blue''' '''colour and with the text '''Confidential'''
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''

In this tutorial, we have learnt to:
* Create and customize watermarks using the draftwatermark package
* Control watermark visibility on specific pages
* Use the eso-pic package for watermarking over the images
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''

Add a watermark with:
* '''Text''': PRELIMINARY
* '''Color''': red
* '''Font size''': 3cm
* '''Angle''': 60 degrees

|| As an '''Assignment '''add a watermark with the following attributes.
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

LaTeX/C3/Links-and-URLs/English

2025-09-26T05:22:26Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the script: Links and URLs ''' '''Authors: Ambika Vanchinathan''' '''Keywords:''' LaTeX, hyperref, url, clickable links, line breaks, URLs, email links, internal..."

'''Title of the script: Links and URLs '''

'''Authors: Ambika Vanchinathan'''

'''Keywords:''' LaTeX, hyperref, url, clickable links, line breaks, URLs, email links, internal links, PDF bookmarks, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this Spoken tutorial on''' Links and URLs''' in''' LaTeX.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives '''
|| In this tutorial we will learn to,
* Create clickable URLs.
* Use url package to break long URLs.
* Set email, external & internal links.
* Customize link colors and styles with hyperref package.
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using:
* Linux Mint version 21.3
* TeXworks version 0.6.6
* A working internet connection.
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of LaTeX.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

'''1. hyperref-eg.tex'''

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.

|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| '''Highlight :'''

lines 19 to 26

'''\usepackage['''

'''colorlinks=true, % color the text of links'''

'''linkcolor=blue, % color for internal links'''

'''urlcolor=magenta, % color for URLs'''

'''breaklinks=true, % allow links to break across lines'''

'''pdfborder={0 0 0}, % remove borders around links'''

'''bookmarks=true % enable PDF bookmarks'''

''']{hyperref}'''
|| These commands import the '''hyperref package''' with various options.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 6 for all the lines in this row.

'''\usepackage[hyphens]{url}'''

'''Highlight line 26'''

'''{hyperref}'''
|| '''\usepackage[hyphens]{url}''' imports the url package with the hyphens option.

Make sure to load this command before '''hyperref''', as it loads the '''url''' package.

We add this command to enable the '''hyphens''' option for better line breaks.The hyphens allow long '''URLs''' to break at '''hyphens''' when they don’t fit the line.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 39

'''\url{https://spoken-tutorial.org}'''

'''Highlight: \url'''
|| We used this command to get the '''clickable link''' in the document

The '''\url '''command takes a '''url '''as its argument and typesets it as a clickable link
|-
|| Click on the green Typeset button to run the codeClick on the link and select Yes.

Click the url and point the cursor to the website.
|| Click on the green '''Typeset '''button to run the code.

A pop up '''Open URL''' opens with a warning message.

Read the message and click on the Yes button.

Spoken tutorial page opens.
|-
|| Comment the line 41.
|| Comment the line 41.
|-
|| Run the code and show the output
|| Let's run the code

We see 2 long URLs.

One URL is wrapped to the next line, while the other extends to the margin.

One is wrapped because it breaks at the '''/ '''(forward slash) automatically.

Let's wrap the second URL as well.
|-
|| Uncomment the lines 10 to 16
|| Uncomment the lines 10 to 16.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''lines 10 to 16'''

'''\do\a\do\b\do\c\do\d\do\e\do\f\do\g\do\h\do\i\do\j%'''

'''\do\k\do\l\do\m\do\n\do\o\do\p\do\q\do\r\do\s\do\t%'''

'''\do\u\do\v\do\w\do\x\do\y\do\z\do\A\do\B\do\C\do\D\do\E\do\F\do\G\do\H\do\I\do\J%'''

'''\do\K\do\L\do\M\do\N\do\O\do\P\do\Q\do\R\do\S\do\T%'''

'''\do\U\do\V\do\W\do\X\do\Y\do\Z}'''
|| This macro allows the URLs to wrap correctly.

This command allows URL breaks after any lowercase or uppercase letter from A to Z.
|-
|| Click on the green typeset button to run the code.

Point the cursor to the second long URL.

Click on the link.

Click Yes in the warning pop up window.

Page directed to the website.
|| Let’s run the code.

We now see that the second long URL wraps neatly to the next line.

This is because we allowed line breaks after every alphabet in the URL.

Let us click on the link.

If the pop up appears please click the Yes button.

The link takes us to its website.
|-
|| Comment the line 53
|| Comment the line 53
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 56
|| The command''' \href '''creates an email link.

This command takes 2 arguments.

1. '''URL:''' The hyperlink target (web address, email, or internal reference)

2.'''text''': The visible, clickable text
|-
|| Click on the green typeset button to show the output.

Click Yes in the warning pop up window.

Point the cursor to the Email link.
|| Run the code.

The output shows an Email link

Let us click on the '''email link'''

Clicking this link opens the default email client

Let us see how to code it
|-
|| Comment line 59
|| Comment line 59.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 62
|| The '''\href''' command can also display custom link text instead of showing the full URL

Here, clicking on '''Spoken Tutorial''' opens the specified webpage
|-
|| Run the code
Show the output

Click Yes in the warning pop up window.
|| Run the code

The output shows an external link

Let us click on it

It takes us to the SpokenTutorial website
|-
|| comment the line 65
|| Comment the line 65
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 67
|| The '''\hyperref''' command creates internal links within the document

It takes 2 arguments

1.'''label:''' The name of the label to link to which is defined earlier with '''\label''' command

2.'''link text''': The clickable text shown in the document

Here, it takes us to the '''section''' labelled '''sec:target'''
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

line 71, 72
|| This is the section referred to using an internal link.

Here is the target section labeled '''sec:target''' which the internal link jumps to.
|-
|| Run the code

Show the output

We run the code twice.
|| LaTeX builds the document in multiple steps.

Let us run the code

In the first run, it collects information for labels, references, page numbers etc

At this point \ref, \pageref, \autoref used by hyperref don’t have values yet.
|-
|| Run the code.

Cursor on the output.

Point the cursor to the clickable url.

Click on it.

Cursor to the target section.
|| Let us run the code again.

This time it uses the stored info and creates hyperlinks, bookmarks, TOC etc.

Now we can see a clickable url after the second run which takes us to a website.

Let us click on it.

It takes us to the target section.
|-
|| '''Slide 6 '''

'''Summary'''

'''In this tutorial, we have learnt to:'''
* '''Create clickable URLs.'''
* '''Use url package to break long URLs.'''
* '''Set email, external & internal links.'''
* '''Customize link colors and styles with hyperref package.'''
|| With this we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''

As an assignment,

1. Create an external link with custom text

2. Create an internal link to a labeled section within your document
|| As an assignment, please do the following:
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| Thank you for joining
|-
|}

LaTeX/C3/Dynamic-Layout-Adjustments/English

2025-09-25T10:09:23Z

Ketkinaina: Created page with "'''Title of the Script: Dynamic Layout Adjustments''' '''Author: Ambika Vanchinathan''' '''Keywords:''' LateX,  geometry package, page layout, margins, checkoddpage, if..."

'''Title of the Script: Dynamic Layout Adjustments'''

'''Author: Ambika Vanchinathan'''

'''Keywords:''' LateX,  geometry package, page layout, margins, checkoddpage, ifoddpage, else, fi, video tutorial.

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Dynamic Layout Adjustments.'''
|-
|| '''Slide 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn how to:
* Use the '''changepage''' package
* Adjust page dimensions and margins
* Adjust the text width in the middle of the document
* Modify the layout based on whether page number is odd or even
|-
|| '''Slide 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using:
* Linux Mint OS version 21.3
* Texworks version 0.6.6
|-
|| '''Slide 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learners should have basic knowledge of LaTeX.
|-
|| '''Slide 5'''

'''Code files'''

The following code file is required to practice this tutorial:

1. geomery-eg.tex

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|| The following code file is required to practice this tutorial.

This file is provided in the Code Files link of this tutorial page.
|-
||
|| Let us get started.
|-
|| Comment line 51

Uncomment line 19, 53, 60
|| Comment the line 51.

Uncomment the lines 19, 53, and 60
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''line 53\begin{adjustwidth}{1cm}{2cm}'''

'''Highlight:'''

'''{adjustwidth}'''

'''{1cm}'''

'''{2cm}'''
|| The '''adjustwidth''' command is from the '''changepage '''package

This command reduces the left margin by 1 cm and the right margin by 2 cm.
|-
|| Click the green Typeset button and show the output
|| Let’s run the code to see the output.

Observe the changes in page 2.
|-
|| Comment line 53

Uncomment line 54
|| Comment the line 53

Uncomment the line 54
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

''' line 54'''

'''\begin{adjustwidth}{1cm}{-2cm}'''

'''Highlight:'''

''' {-2cm}'''
|| This command increases the rightside '''textwidth '''by 2cm

Note the '''minus '''sign in the command. 

It is used to increase the width.
|-
|| Run the code and show the output
|| Let’s run the code.

The text shifted 1 cm closer to  the left margin and 2 cm away from the right margin.
|-
||
|| Now, let us look into  conditional command and statements
|-
|| Comment the lines 54 and 60.

Uncomment lines 61 to 68
|| Comment the lines 54 and 60.

Uncomment the lines 61 to 68
|-
|| '''Highlight: line 61'''
|| '''\newpage''' command opens a new page.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''line 63'''
|| The '''\checkoddpage''' command checks whether the page number is odd or even.
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''line 64, 65'''
|| '''\ifoddpage''' command checks if the page  is an odd page.

If it is odd page, then it does what is in the next line

Here, it simply prints the line 65
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''line 66, 67'''
|| '''\else''' statement is performed if it is not an odd page

Here, it prints the line 67
|-
|| '''Highlight:'''

'''line 68'''
|| '''\fi''' command ends the if command.
|-
|| Let us run the code and see the output
|-
|| '''Run the code'''

'''show the third page'''
|| A new page is added as third page,

Since it is an odd page the oddpage part of the command is performed.

We see that the '''odd-numbered page''' in bold is printed.
|-
|| Cursor on the third page.
|| This conditional statement is useful for modifying layout or content

It allows changes based on whether the page number is odd or even

Any command can be given after that.
|-
|| '''Slide 6'''

'''Summary'''

'''In this tutorial, we have learnt how to,'''
* Use the '''changepage''' package
* Adjust page dimensions and margins
* Adjust the text width in the middle of the document
* Modify the layout based on whether page number is odd or even
|| With this, we come to the end of this tutorial.

Let us summarise.
|-
|| '''Slide 7'''

'''Assignment'''

As an '''Assignment'''

Apply adjustwidth to indent a paragraph by 2 cm on the left and 1 cm on the right side
|| As an '''Assignment, '''please do the following
|-
|| '''Slide 8'''

'''Thank you'''
|| Thank you for joining
|-
|}